JP2023173474A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve amusement in executing an operation request performance.SOLUTION: A game machine includes performance means which executes a first operation promotion performance which promotes an operation of first operation means at a first timing, and executes a second operation promotion performance which promotes an operation of the first operation means at a second timing later than the first timing. The performance means can execute a first response performance, when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated; can execute a second response performance, when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated; and executes the first response performance and then executes the second operation promotion performance. The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from an indication of a rotation start of one game to an indication of a rotation start of a next game to the one game. The second timing is a timing after the performance means executes the first response performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 94

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a slot machine (spinning machine) and a pachinko machine (pinball game machine).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a slot machine, for example, has been known as one type of gaming machine. In this slot machine, the reels are rotated by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the winning combination is determined internally by an internal lottery.When the reels are stopped by operating the stop button, the reels are displayed on the reel window. It is configured such that a winning combination is established when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed according to internal determination. When a winning combination involving the payout of medals is established, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination are paid out.

In such a game machine, an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button is executed, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2016-158941A

However, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest when executing the operation request performance.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that increases interest when performing an operation request performance.

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the present invention includes, as one aspect thereof,
Multiple reels decorated with multiple types of designs and driven to rotate,
a start operation means for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
a first operating means operable by the player;
A performance means for performing the performance,
A game machine comprising:
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The performance means is a means for executing the second operation promotion performance after performing the first response performance,
The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is a timing after the performance means executes the first response performance,
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine that increases interest when performing an operation request performance.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a winning line and a performance line of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6, FIG. 7, and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (including activation winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination. It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, together with FIGS. 5, 7, and 8. 5, 6 and 8, it is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, together with FIGS. 5, 6, and 7. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing types and names of internal winning combinations of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. A second sub-control unit main process, a second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and a second sub-control unit image control process of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a flow. It is an example of a time chart when the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention executes a target effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the display mode of a reel, and the performance mode of a performance image display device in the case of FIG. 15 (a). It is a figure which shows the transition of the display mode of a reel, and the performance mode of a performance image display device in the case of FIG.15(b). FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a reel display mode and a performance mode of a performance image display device when the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention internally wins BB. It is a table showing an example of the occurrence frequency of notification effects for each internal winning combination of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing some types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations) of a slot machine according to Modification 1 of an embodiment of the present invention, and symbol combinations corresponding to some of the winning combinations; (b) is a diagram illustrating the structure of some of the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to Modification 1 of the embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing some types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations) of a slot machine according to a second modification of an embodiment of the present invention, and symbol combinations corresponding to some of the winning combinations; , (b) is a diagram showing some of the types of winning combinations (including activation winning combinations) of a slot machine according to Modification 2 of an embodiment of the present invention, and symbol combinations corresponding to some of the winning combinations. be. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention with the front door opened; FIG. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a winning line of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and a diagram showing an operation of a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing an arrangement of symbols on each reel of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 28, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination. FIG. 27, FIG. 29, and FIG. 30 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination. FIG. 27, FIG. 28, and FIG. 30 are diagrams showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination. FIG. 27, FIG. 28, and FIG. 29 are diagrams showing types of winning combinations (including activation winning combinations) of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention and symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the types and names of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, together with FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the types and names of internal winning combinations of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, together with FIG. 31. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of a main control unit of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. A second sub-control unit main process, a second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, a second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and a second sub-control unit image control process of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing a flow. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the transition of effect images displayed on the effect image display device in the CZ state and AT state of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation navigation when the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention internally wins the press order symbol blue 7 replay in the AT state. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation navigation when the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention internally wins the press order symbol blue 7 replay in the AT state. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation navigation when the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention internally wins the press order symbol blue 7 replay in the AT state. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation navigation when the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention internally wins the press order symbol blue 7 replay in the AT state. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating band display performance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of band display performance of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of band display performance of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating counting of the number of acquired coins displayed in the AT state of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating performance aspects of an operation promotion performance and an operation response performance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance aspect of a modified example of an operation promotion performance and an operation response performance of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a winning line. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel developed in a two-dimensional manner. It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout of each winning combination. It is a diagram showing internal winning combinations and winning probabilities. It is a diagram showing details of some internal winning combinations. 50 is a transition diagram of lottery states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49. FIG. 50 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of transition from a normal AT state to a higher AT state via a higher AT state, a bonus state B, and a higher AT state. 63 is a diagram showing the state of the game machine along the timing chart of FIG. 62. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of production setting by a user. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed. (a) to (g) are diagrams showing the state at each timing of (a) to (g) shown in FIG. 65. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is not executed. (a) to (g) are diagrams showing the state at each timing of (a) to (g) shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed while a volume adjustment screen is displayed. (a) to (h) are diagrams showing the state at each timing of (a) to (h) shown in FIG. 69. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the number of bets has been set but is insufficient to start the game, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the number of bets has been set but is insufficient to start the game. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart when the settlement button 134 is operated while counting the "elapsed time". FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration in which the timing of automatic initialization is varied depending on the set volume. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart and its state when a demo screen is displayed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart when a demo screen is not displayed. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a timing chart when transitioning from an AT state to a normal state A. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the timing chart of FIG. 75. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing various members disposed inside the main body 101. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the slot machine 100 when viewed from the rear side. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an example of the arrangement of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door 102 and some members of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 are removed. FIG. (a) It is a front view of the voltage display sticker 294. (b) to (d) are front views of voltage display stickers according to modified examples. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 1) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification example 2) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are described. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modified example 3) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modified example 4) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are described. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modified example 5) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown. FIG. 6 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 6) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 7) of a voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown. FIG. 12 is a side view of a housing showing an example of arrangement of voltage display stickers 294 (modified example 8), and various dimensions are described. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of slot machines 100 stored in a warehouse or the like before being installed in an island facility. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating performance aspects of an operation promotion performance and an operation response performance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of operation promotion performance and operation response performance of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of operation promotion performance and operation response performance of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of operation promotion performance and operation response performance of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart of operation promotion performance and operation response performance of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance aspect of a modified example of an operation promotion performance and an operation response performance of the slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[First embodiment]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the lottery result and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out any money.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the reel window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

To explain specifically using FIG. 2, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is the middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed on the left reel lower row, and the symbol displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram) The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 5 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 112, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 as shown in the figure) are the upper row symbols of the right reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 as shown in the diagram) on the right reel. The middle row symbols and the symbols displayed at the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower row symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through the reel window 113. Three of each are displayed vertically, nine in total. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line (also referred to as an active line) 114. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. The winning line is predetermined based on the number of medals bet as game media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet machine, and if the number of inserted medals is less than three, the winning line 114 will not be activated, and if the number of medals inserted is three, a prize will be won. Line 114 becomes valid. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

In this embodiment, one winning line 114, specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a middle winning line L1 is provided, which is composed of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol. . Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a downward-sloping winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward-to-the-right winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

In this embodiment, lines other than the middle winning line L1 are used as production lines (hereinafter referred to as production lines) DL. Specifically, the production line DL includes a right-down production line DL1 consisting of a left reel upper row symbol, a middle reel middle row symbol, and a right reel lower row symbol, a left reel lower row symbol, a middle reel middle row symbol, and a right reel upper row symbol. The right-up production line DL2 consists of a left reel lower symbol, the middle reel lower symbol, and the right reel lower symbol DL3, which consists of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. An upper stage production line DL4 is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, when a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination described later is stopped and displayed on a winning line or a production line, it may be simply abbreviated as a winning combination being displayed.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 as a stop operation is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. , effect image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). It has a structure that appears.

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that executes a presentation to be described later. Note that the performance button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined performance.

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 3. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The state of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, performance button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 1300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 4. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (nine types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a "bell symbol," the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "watermelon symbol," and the number 1 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay symbol." ” are arranged respectively.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 5 to 8. In addition, this figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), symbol combinations on the winning line 114 corresponding to each winning combination, payouts, names, and notes of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include BB, replay combinations 1 to 2, single card combinations 1 to 5, and small combinations 1 to 54. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, BB (Big Bonus) is a bonus role (special role) that transfers to a bonus game, and replay roles 1 and 2 (replay) are replays without inserting new medals. The replayable combinations that can be played are sometimes called "actuation combinations" to be distinguished from the winning combinations. In this embodiment, "winning" includes a case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, for example, BB, re-gaming role 1 -2 prizes are also included.

BB (Big Bonus) is a special winning combination (activation winning combination) that starts a big bonus game (BB game) upon winning. The corresponding symbol combination is "Blank 1-Blank 1-BAR". Furthermore, flag carryover is performed for BB. In other words, when BB is internally won, a flag indicating this is set up (stored in a predetermined area of RAM 308 of main control unit 300), but even if BB1 is not won in that game, the internal winning is continued until BB is won. The state in which the flag indicating ``Blank 1-Blank 1-BAR'' corresponding to BB is lined up on the active line is maintained and the BB is being won internally even after the next game. .

Replay winning combinations 1 and 2 (replay) are winning winning combinations (actuation winning combinations) that allow you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize. You can play the next game with a number, and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are "Replay-Replay-Replay" for re-gaming combination 1 and "Bell-Replay-Watermelon" for re-gaming combination 2. Note that each of the replay winning combination 1 and the replay winning combination 2 may be referred to as a "normal replay."

Single-card winning combinations 1 to 5 and small winning combinations 1 to 54 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIGS. 5 to 8. Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is as shown in FIGS. 5 to 8.

For example, the 1-card role 1 is "Replay-Bell-Watermelon," the 1-card role 2 is "Replay-Replay-Seven 2," the 1-card role 3 is "Replay-Seven 2-7 2," and the 1-card role 4 is " Seven 2-Replay-Seven 2'', and 1 piece 5 is ``Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2''. In addition, 1-card role 1 is "common 1-card role", 1-card role 2 to 4 are each "uneven 1-card role", 1-card role 5 is "7 matching 1-card role", small role 1 and small role 2 each as a "weak cherry", each of minor roles 3 and 4 as a "strong cherry", minor role 5 as a "watermelon", minor role 6 as a "bell", and minor roles 7 to 54 as a "one-piece role" It is sometimes called.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the types, names, and notes of internal winning combinations.

FIG. 9 shows 13 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 0 to 12) that are combinations of the combinations described in FIGS. 5 to 8. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery (internal lottery) at the time of the game start operation.

Here, we will outline the winning probability of the internal winning combination.

The winning probability of each internal winning combination is determined by converting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each internal winning combination to numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described later (in this embodiment). 65536). The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each internal winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In reality, this lottery data has settings 1 to 6 with different winning probabilities for at least one internal winning combination, and game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings. I can do it.

Conditional device number 0 is a conditional device in which BB alone wins internally. In this conditional device, the flag is carried over, and it is possible to win a BB in the game after that game.

Condition device number 1 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either replay combination 1 or 2 (normal replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Conditional device number 2 is a conditional device in which 1-card combinations 1 to 5 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation is suitable (in the case of a successful eye press), you will win a 1-card winning combination of 5 (7-set 1-card winning combination), while the right first stop will stop. If the timing of the operation is not suitable (in the case of failure to press the target), a prize will be won in one of the one-card combinations 1 to 4 (common one-card combination, irregular one-card combination). In addition, for 1-card winnings 2 to 4 (irregular 1-card winnings), you will win if you can properly stop Seven 2 on the right reel, but if you cannot operate near Seven 2 properly, you will win a 1-card winning. 1 (common 1-card role) wins. For example, in the 1-card combination 2, if the seven 2 could be suitably stopped on the right reel 112, but the seven 2 could not be suitably stopped on the left reel 110 and the middle reel 111, the one-card combination 3 If the seven 2 could be stopped properly on the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112, but the seven 2 could not be stopped properly on the left reel 110, the 1-card winning combination 4 would be the left reel 110 and the right reel 112. A prize is awarded when the seven 2 can be suitably stopped on the right reel 112, but the seven 2 cannot be suitably stopped on the middle reel 111. In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a 1-card winning combination of 1 (common 1-card winning combination) is won.

Note that the condition device number 2 (middle row of 7, 1 card) of the present embodiment is a condition device that can win 1-card combination 5 (7-card, 1 card) in the case of the first stop on the right. Separately, a conditional device may be provided in which a 1-card winning combination of 5 (a set of 7 and 1-card winning combination) can be won in the case of the middle first stop or the left first stop. In addition, in order to make it possible to win the 1-card hand 5 (7-card 1-card hand), we have created a condition that allows for 4 choices, not just the 3 choices of left first stop, middle first stop, and right first stop. may be provided, or a condition device may be provided so that there are six choices.

Conditional device number 3 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 1 and 2 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, either the small winning combination 1 or 2 (weak cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Conditional device number 4 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 3 and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either the small winning combination 3 or 4 (strong cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 5 is a condition device in which the small winning combination 5 is internally won independently. With this conditional device, a small winning combination of 5 (watermelon) is won.

Condition device number 6 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left, center, and right, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the left, any of the small roles 23, 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37-40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the first left stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the first left stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 7 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6-22, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, and 52 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left, center, right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the left, you may win any of the small winnings 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52. be. That is, if the stop operation is the first left stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the first left stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 8 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle and left, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of center, right, left, and left, one of the small winning combinations 23 to 38 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop in the middle, small winnings 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21, 22, 39, 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 You may win a prize in one of the following. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the middle first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 9 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6, 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 23-38, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, and 52 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of center, right, and left, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, left, and right, one of the small winning combinations 23 to 38 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the middle first stop, you may win any of the small winnings 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52. be. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the middle first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 10 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 54 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle, a small winning combination of 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, center, and left, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the right, any of the small winnings 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21-24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37, 38 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the first right stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the right first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 11 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6, 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 39-54 are internally won. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, center, and left, a small winning combination of 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the right, you may win any of the small winnings 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36. be. That is, if the stop operation is the first right stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the right first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 12 is a condition device in which the small winning combination 6 is internally won alone. With this conditional device, a small win of 6 (bell) is won.

For the above condition device numbers 6 to 11, operation conditions (here, the order of pressing, hereinafter, the order of pressing the correct answer) for winning the bell (small winning combination 6) are defined respectively. In the following explanation, condition device numbers 6 to 11 may be collectively referred to as the push order bell. In the case where these condition device numbers 6 to 11 are internally won, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of each correct answer, a bell (minor win 6) is won. On the other hand, if the stopping operation does not match the correct pressing order, internally won one-card winning combinations other than Bell (small winning number 6) are stopped preferentially. In addition, with the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct press order, there may be a loss. It may be configured such that a prize is always won for some role.

<Slot machine gaming status>
Next, types and transitions of gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 10 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. Specifically, FIG. 10(a) shows the RT-based gaming state. The lottery data for the winning combination internal lottery process described above is set for each RT-based gaming state. Further, FIG. 10(b) shows an AT system game state. The AT system game state is a game state related to the performance.

The RT-based gaming states of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a normal gaming state, a BB internal winning state, and a BB gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), in the normal game state which is the initial state, when BB is internally won, a BB internally won state is set. The BB internal winning state is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the BB is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at an appropriate timing, the symbol combination corresponding to the BB corresponding to this flag is displayed. This is a gaming state in which you can play. Further, in the BB internal winning state, when a symbol combination corresponding to the internally winning BB is displayed, the state shifts to the BB gaming state. This BB gaming state shifts to a normal gaming state when more than a specified number of medals (11 in this embodiment) are paid out. In this way, the BB gaming state of this embodiment is not a gaming state that is highly profitable for the player.

On the other hand, the AT-based gaming states of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a normal state, a target performance preparation state (hereinafter simply referred to as the preparation state), an AT state, and a standby state. and. Note that the normal state, preparation state, and standby state may be collectively referred to as a non-AT state. The AT state is a state in which a presentation regarding the details of the stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "operation navigation") is executed more frequently than in the non-AT state. In other words, the AT state means that the frequency of executing the operation navigation that notifies the player of information including the operation timing (symbols, etc.) or the operation order (press order) of the stop operation is non-AT so that an advantageous result is brought to the player. set higher than the state.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), if the AT lottery is won in the normal state which is the initial state, the state shifts to the preparation state. In the preparation state, in a game in which the first "one-card combination 1 to 5" (one card in a set of seven in the middle row) is internally won, an "aim effect" (details will be described later) is executed to make the player aim for the seven-two symbol. In other words, the "aim performance" is a symbol suggestion performance that suggests the push order and symbols in order to win a 1-card combination 5 (7-card 1-card combination), and is one of the above-mentioned operation navigations. In addition, in the preparation state, if the push order bell is internally selected, an operation navigation indicating the correct push order is always executed. In addition, in the preparation state, when a rare combination (specifically, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a watermelon) is internally won, an additional lottery, a stock lottery, and a specialized zone lottery are executed.

When a one-card combination 5 (one-card combination of seven) is won in a game in which one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one card of a set of seven in the middle row) are internally won in the initial state in the preparation state, the state shifts to the AT state. On the other hand, if you do not win 1-card hand 5 (1-card hand of 7) in the first game in which you won internally for 1-card hand 1 to 5 (1 card in a set of 7 in the middle row), that is, any of 1-card hand 1 to 4 (common 1-card winning combination or irregular 1-card winning combination), the system shifts to a standby state. In other words, the preparation state is a period until the first aiming performance is executed.

The standby state is a state that continues for at least a predetermined period (10 games in this embodiment), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, in a game in which the 1-card combination 1 to 5 (1 card of 7 in the middle row) is internally won, the 7 2 symbol is Execute the "Aim Direction" that makes you aim. In addition, in the standby state, if the push order bell is internally selected, an operation navigation that shows the correct push order is executed with a probability of 1/2. Specifically, in this embodiment, if an odd-numbered push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation is executed, and if an even number push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation is not executed. In addition, in the standby state, in games where rare combinations (specifically, weak cherry, strong cherry, and watermelon) are internally won, the additional lottery, stock lottery, and specialized zone lottery are not executed. In this manner, in this embodiment, the standby state is less advantageous than the preparation state.

The standby state shifts to the AT state when a one-card combination 5 (one-card combination of seven) is won in a game in which one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one combination of seven in the middle row) are won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, if after this predetermined period of time has elapsed, in a game in which the 1-card combination 1 to 5 (1 card in a set of 7 in the middle row) is internally won, the 1-card combination 5 (1 card in a set of 7) is not won, that is, the 1-card combination 1 - 4 (common 1-card winning combination or irregular 1-card winning combination), the standby state is set again. Like the first standby state, this second standby state continues for at least a predetermined period (10 games in this embodiment). In this way, in this embodiment, if a one-card combination 5 (a combination of seven and one card) is not won in a game in which one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one card of a set of seven in the middle row) are internally won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the standby state is entered. It's starting to repeat.

In the AT state, if the pressing order bell is internally selected, an operation navigation indicating the correct pressing order is always executed. In addition, in the AT state, when a rare combination (specifically, a weak cherry, a strong cherry, and a watermelon) is internally won, an additional lottery, a stock lottery, and a specialized zone lottery are executed. The AT state is the most advantageous state among AT-based gaming states. The AT state ends when the allotted number of games (the number of AT games) is played, and the game transitions to the normal state.

From the above, the advantages of the AT-based gaming states of this embodiment are set in the order of AT state>preparation state>standby state. Note that the BB gaming state of this embodiment is not a gaming state that is highly profitable for the player as described above, and is less advantageous than the standby state.

In addition, in the preparation state of this embodiment, if the push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation that shows the correct push order is always executed; however, if the push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation is executed. The probability does not have to be 100%. Of course, even in such a case, the preparation state is more advantageous than the standby state.

In addition, in the standby state, when the push order bell is internally selected, an operation navigation is executed that shows the correct push order with a probability of 1/2, but the method is not limited to the above method. For example, if the conditional device numbers 6 to 8 are internally selected among the pressing order bells, the operation navigation is executed, and if the conditional device numbers 9 to 11 are internally selected, the operation navigation is not executed. Good too. In addition, if there is an internal winning combination of push order bells that can pay out two types of medals (for example, 13 medals, 7 medals, etc.) depending on the operation details, the push order for the smaller number of medals to be paid out will be changed. You may also execute the operation navigation shown. In addition, in the standby state, if the push order bell was internally selected, the operation navigation that showed the correct push order with a probability of 1/2 was executed, but the operation navigation that showed the correct push order with a probability of 1/2 was not necessarily executed. It doesn't have to be executed. Of course, even in such a case, the standby state is less advantageous than the ready state.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

Further, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals that have been inserted is determined, and the first sub-control unit 400 In response, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the internal winning combinations is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internal winning combination is activated (the flag for the internal winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control is performed to transition the gaming state (RT-based gaming state, AT-based gaming state), and for example, in the case of a BB win, preparations are made to start BB gaming from the next time. do. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 12) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 13. Note that FIG. 13A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 13(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 13(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 13(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 13(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 13(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 13A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 14. Note that FIG. 14A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 14(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 14C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 14(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 14(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processing such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing updating processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 14(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 14(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 14(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 14(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Aim production>
Hereinafter, the aiming effect of this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 15 to 17. The aiming performance is a symbol suggestion performance that can be executed when the one-card role 1 to 5 (one set of 7 in the middle row) is internally won in the preparation state or standby state, and it is possible to perform the one-card role 5 (one set of 7 in the middle row). Notify the operation details for winning a prize. For example, (1) in the preparation state or standby state, if one card role 1 to 5 (one card in the middle row of 7) is internally won, a symbol suggestion effect is reliably executed, and (2) in the preparation state, the number of games for a predetermined number of games is Until this is completed, the symbol suggestion performance will not be executed even if one card 1 to 5 (one card with 7 in the middle row) is internally won. (3) In the prepared state, the Nth (N is an integer of 2 or more) 1 (4) If the number of medals acquired is more than the predetermined number in the preparation state, and the number of medals acquired is more than the predetermined number in the preparation state, if the winning combination is internally won for the winning combination of 1 to 5 (middle row 7), the symbol suggestion effect is executed. (5) If the number of executions of the operation navigation for winning the push order bell in the preparation state is a predetermined number of times or more, and the number of executions of the operation navigation for winning the press order bell in the preparation state is greater than the predetermined number of times, and the one-card role 1 to 5 is executed. (6) If the number of losses in the winning combination internal lottery process in the preparation state is a predetermined number or more, and one winning combination 1 to 5 (1 card in the middle row) is internally won, If the player wins internally (one set of 7 pieces in the middle row), a target performance may be executed. Specifically, in the aiming effect, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, there is an effect that shows a right first stop operation and a stop operation that stops the Seven 2 symbol in the middle position for each reel 110 to 112. The image d11 is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 15(a) shows a time chart when the eye press is successful in a game in which a target performance in the preparation state (hereinafter also referred to as the first target performance) is executed. In this case, in the game (a1 shown in FIG. 15(a)) in which 1-card combinations 1 to 5 (middle row of 7 and 1 card) were internally won in the prepared state, 1-card combination 5 (7 and 1 card) was won. , the AT state starts from the next game (see FIG. 10(b)). In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the preparation state is started after the winning notification (specifically, the notification indicating AT winning) is executed in the last part of the continuous performance executed in the normal state. It has become.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the transition of the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the eye press is successful in the game in which the first aiming effect is executed.

Here, the Nth game is a game in the preparation state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an image d10 of the effect during the preparation state, which indicates that the game is in the preparation state.

The M-th game is the final game in the preparation state, and indicates time a1 in FIG. 15(a). The M-th game is a game in which 1-card winnings 1 to 5 (1 card in a set of 7 in the middle row) are internally won, and the aiming effect is executed, and the effect image display device 157 displays 1-card winning 5 (1 card in a set of 7). ) is displayed. An effect image d11 showing the operation details for winning a prize is displayed. After that, the player successfully performed the eye press operation, and the numbers "Seven 2 - Seven 2 - Seven 2" were lined up on the winning line L1, so he won a 1-card hand 5 (a 1-card hand of 7) and received 1 medal. is paid out. In addition, the effect image display device 157 displays a effect image d12 indicating that a one-card winning combination 5 (one-card combination of seven) has been won.

The M+1th game is the next game after the game in which the first aiming performance was executed, and is the first game in the AT state. In the M+1 game shown in FIG. 16, since the CRL bell was internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is executed, and the effect image d13 indicating the operation order of the middle left on the right is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Ru.

On the other hand, FIG. 15(b) shows a time chart when the eye press fails in the game in which the first aiming effect is executed, and the eye press succeeds in the game in which the second aim effect is executed. . In this case, in a game (b1 shown in FIG. 15(b)) in which the one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one card with a set of seven in the middle row) in the preparation state are internally won, the one-card combination 5 (one card with a set of seven) is not won. Therefore, the standby state starts from the next game (see FIG. 10(b)). Then, in a game (b2 shown in FIG. 15(b)) in which one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one card in a set of 7 in the middle row) are internally won after a predetermined period of time in the standby state has passed, one-card combination 5 (one card in a set of 7) Since the player won a prize, the AT state starts from the next game (see FIG. 10(b)).

In addition, in the present embodiment, the aim performance is executed in a game in which the first one-card combination 1 to 5 (one card in a set of 7 in the middle row) is internally won after a predetermined period of time in the standby state has elapsed, but the aim is not limited to this. . For example, (1) an aim performance may be executed in a game in which the first winning combinations 1 to 5 (one of the seven in the middle row) are internally won on the Nth (N is an integer of 2 or more) times in the standby state; (2) If the number of medals acquired is less than a predetermined number in the standby state and one card role 1 to 5 (1 card of 7 in the middle row) is internally won, a target effect may be executed; 3) In the standby state, when the number of executions of the operation navigation for winning the push order bell is less than a predetermined number of times, and when one card role 1 to 5 (1 card in the middle row of 7) is internally won, the aim effect will be executed. (4) If the number of losses is greater than a predetermined number of times in the internal lottery process of the winning combination in the standby state, and the winning combination is internally won from 1 to 5 (1 card of 7 in the middle row). may also be executed.

FIG. 17 shows the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect image display device 157 when the eye press fails in the game where the first aiming effect is executed and the eye press succeeds in the game where the second aim effect is executed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode.

Here, the Nth game is a game in the preparation state, and the effect image display device 157 displays an image d10 of the effect during the preparation state, which indicates that the game is in the preparation state.

The M-th game is the final game in the preparation state, and indicates time b1 in FIG. 15(b). The M-th game is a game in which 1-card winnings 1 to 5 (1 card in a set of 7 in the middle row) are internally won, and the aiming effect is executed, and the effect image display device 157 displays 1-card winning 5 (1 card in a set of 7). ) is displayed. An effect image d11 showing the operation details for winning a prize is displayed. After that, the player failed in the eye press operation, so the symbol combination "Replay-Seven 2-Seven 2" was aligned on the winning line L1, and he won a 1-card role of 3 (an uneven 1-card role), and received a medal. The coins are paid out. The effect image d11 is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a game in which the aiming effect is executed, even if the eye press operation is successful and the player wins a 1-card winning combination of 5 (a set of 7 and 1 card role), the eye-press operation fails and the player wins 1 card. Even if the player wins any of the winning combinations 1 to 4 (common 1-card winning combination, irregular 1-card winning combination), the profit that the player obtains in the game is the same. In other words, even if a player who is not good at eye-pulling fails in eye-pulling, the same profit as if he succeeds in eye-pulling will be given, so no loss will occur in the game.

Note that in the game in which the aiming effect of this embodiment is executed, one medal is paid out regardless of whether the eye press operation is successful or unsuccessful, but the present invention is not limited to this. The profit that the player obtains in the game need only be the same; for example, in a game where a aiming effect is executed, three medals may be paid out regardless of the operation details, and medals may be paid out due to replay winnings or losses. may not be paid out.

The M+1 game is the next game after the game in which the first aiming performance was executed, and is the first game in the standby state. In the standby state, a standby state effect indicating the standby state is executed, and a effect image d14 indicating the standby state is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In the effect image d14, the background is grayed out, and the message "Waiting" is displayed, so that it can be specified that the player is on standby until the 72 symbols are aligned. Note that although the effect image d14 is displayed in the M+1 game, it may be at the timing when the final stop operation is performed in the M game, or at the timing when the eye press fails. Further, although the effect image d14 is displayed in the standby state, the image d10 may be displayed in the preparation state.

The M+α game is the final game in the standby state, and indicates time b2 in FIG. 15(b). The M+α game is a game in which one card role 1 to 5 (one card in a set of 7 in the middle row) is internally won after playing for a predetermined period in the standby state, and the second aiming performance is executed, and the result is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Displays an effect image d11 showing the operation details for winning the one-card combination 5 (one-card combination of seven). Thereafter, the player successfully performs the eye press operation, and as "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" is lined up on the pay line L1, a set of seven is won and one medal is paid out. The effect image display device 157 displays a effect image d12 indicating that a winning combination of 7 has been won.

The M+α+1 game is the next game after the game in which the second aiming performance was executed, and is the first game in the AT state. In the M+α+1 game shown in FIG. 17, since the CRL bell was internally won, the operation navigation indicating the correct operation order is executed, and the effect image d13 indicating the operation order of the middle left on the right is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Ru.

Although not shown in the drawings, if the player fails in the push operation in the M+α game and wins one of the 1-card roles 1 to 4 (common 1-card role, irregular 1-card role), the M+α+1 game The standby state is started again.

<Production when winning BB>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the transition of the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect mode of the effect image display device 157 when the BB is internally won. Note that the AT system states of each game shown in FIG. 18 are normal states.

In this embodiment, when the bonus combination BB is internally won, a notification effect indicating that the bonus combination has been internally won is not executed. That is, in a game in which a bonus role has been internally won, the performance image display device 157 displays a performance image that suggests that a bonus role has been internally won (for example, the symbol combination corresponding to BB, the symbols constituting BB, and the winning bonus role). (direct or indirect words indicating this) are not displayed. Furthermore, in a broad sense, the information presentation refers to all presentations that notify information about internally elected roles, including operation navigation that shows information about operation contents such as push order and symbols, and suggestive effects that indirectly suggest internally elected roles. Including etc.

Here, with reference to FIG. 19, the execution frequency of the notification effect when BB is internally won will be explained in detail. Note that FIG. 19 is a table showing the frequency of occurrence of notification effects for each internal winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 19, when BB is internally won, no notification performance is performed at all regardless of the AT system gaming state. On the other hand, to explain the internal winning of 1-card combinations 1 to 5 (1 card in the middle row of 7), the probability is 0.5% in the normal state, 100% in the preparation state, and 5% in the AT state. The performance is now executed. The notification performance of 100% execution in the preparation state is the first aiming performance. When the notification effect is executed in the normal state, the system then directly shifts to the AT state, and when the notification effect is executed in the AT state, AT is added.

As described above, in this embodiment, if the one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one card in the middle row of 7) are internally won, the notification effect is executed, while if the BB is internally won, the notification effect is not executed. This is because the flag of a small winning combination cannot be carried over from the next game onwards, but the flag of a bonus winning combination can be carried over from the next game onwards, so when winning a small winning role where the flag cannot be carried over, the notification effect is better than when winning a bonus winning which can carry over the flag. This is to reduce the risk of missing a small role in the game by increasing the frequency of occurrence.

In addition, to explain the case where the small winning combination 5 (watermelon) is internally won, the notification performance is executed with a 100% probability regardless of the AT system gaming state. Also, to explain the case where replay combinations 1 and 2 (replay) are internally won, the notification effect is executed with a probability of 20% in the normal state, 100% in the preparation state, and 60% in the AT state.

Note that the numerical values of the frequency of occurrence of the notification effect for each internal winning role shown in FIG. 19 are just examples, and are not limited to the values shown in FIG. 19, and the numerical value of the frequency of occurrence of the notification effect can be set in various ways. It is.

Further, an execution frequency of 0% is included in a category with a low execution frequency (execution rate), and an execution frequency of 100% is included in a category with a high execution frequency (execution rate). Note that 0% is not limited to strictly 0%, and may include a probability extremely close to 0%, such as 0.001%, for example.

Returning to FIG. 18, to explain the case where BB is internally won, the Nth game is a losing game in the normal gaming state. In this case, only the background image d1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and no notification effect is performed.

The N+1 game is the next game after the loss win, and is a game in which the BB is internally won in the normal gaming state. In this case, as described above, in a game where BB is internally won, the notification effect that suggests that the bonus combination has been internally won is not executed. The effect image display device 157 only displays the background image d1. Note that in the N+1 game, no prize was won on the BB.

The N+2 game is the next game after the game in which BB was internally won, and is the game in which re-gaming combinations 1 to 2 (replay) were internally won in the BB internal winning state and re-gaming combination 1 (normal replay) was won. be. In this case, in the example shown in FIG. 18, the notification effect is not executed (when the internal winning combination in FIG. 19 is a replay and no effect is selected). Therefore, only the background image d1 is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

The N+3rd game is the next game after the game that won internally in the replay, and is a game in which the small winning combination 5 (watermelon) was internally won in the BB internal winning state and the small winning combination 5 (watermelon) was won. A symbol combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is displayed on the production line DL1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19, the notification effect is executed with a probability of 100%, so as shown in FIG. d15 is displayed.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, if the eye press is successful in the preparation state, the transition can be made to the highly advantageous AT state, but even if the eye press is failed in the preparation state, the transition can be made to the standby state, so there is no loss. While reducing this feeling, you can enjoy the feeling of a bonus that requires conventional eye-pressing.

In addition, even if the player fails to hit the target, the same number of medals is awarded as if the player succeeds in the target, so even a player who is not good at hitting the target will not suffer a loss in the game.

In addition, if you win internally for a small role that cannot be carried over to the next game, the frequency of notification effects is set higher than for bonus roles that can be carried over to the next game, so if you win internally for a small role, you will not be able to win. can reduce the risk of

In addition, in the RT system gaming state, the player may perform most of the games in the normal gaming state, or may perform most of the gaming states in the BB internal winning state. In the former case, it is assumed that a certain amount of profit can be obtained from BB, as shown in FIG. 21(b), and in the latter case, it is assumed that there is not much profit obtained from BB.

<Other variations>
In the above embodiment, the bonus combination BB is a single combination, but it may also be a combination of BB and another combination (hereinafter referred to as a special combination). FIG. 20 shows an outline of modification example 1 in which BB is used as an overlapping role. FIG. 20(a) is a diagram showing the types of BB and special winning combination, and the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination, and FIG. 20(b) is a diagram showing the winning combination of the internal winning combination related to BB. It is.

Even if BB exists as an overlapping role with a special role as in Modification 1, the notification effect that suggests that BB has been internally won is not executed, as in the case where BB is internally won in the above embodiment. . During the BB internal winning state, the BB winning flag is being carried over and it becomes easier to win the special combination, so it is more advantageous for the player to carry over the BB winning flag. Therefore, when BB wins internally, the frequency of execution of the notification effect is reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20(a) and (b), if any of the overlapping roles of BB + minor roles A to F is internally won, the correct operation order for winning minor roles A to F will be determined. It is configured so that when the stop operation is performed, a prize is won in the minor winning combinations A to F, and when a symbol corresponding to BB is hit in any other order of operation, a BB prize is won.

Further, in the above embodiment, there is one type of bonus combination, BB, but two types of bonus combinations may be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(a), there are two types of bonus combinations, BB1 and BB2. BB1 can be won internally when betting 2 coins, and BB2 can be won internally when betting 3 coins. (Modification 2). In the case of Modification 2 as well, if BB1 or BB2 is internally won, the notification effect regarding the BB internally won is not executed.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(b), two types of bonus combinations, BB1 and BB2, may be provided (Modification 3). In the case of modification 3, it is a BB gaming state that brings profits to the player. Of course, in the case of modification 3 as well, if BB1 or BB2 is internally won, the notification effect regarding the BB internally won will not be executed. It should be noted that although it is assumed that no notification performance will be performed regarding BB internal winnings, for example, when a small role is won in combination with a small role, such as BB1 + cherry or BB2 + watermelon, a performance suggesting cherry or watermelon may be performed, and a bonus win may be performed. The bonus symbol may be notified after the continuous presentation. In this case, it can be said that the frequency with which symbols are suggested in winning games is higher for 7-set combinations than for bonuses.

In addition, in the case of the second modification and the third modification, BB1 and BB2 may be used as an internal winning combination of a single winning combination, or may be an internal winning combination of a duplicate winning combination.

In addition, in Modifications 1 to 3, similarly to the above embodiment, if one-card combinations 1 to 5 (one card of 7 in the middle row) are internally won in the preparation state or standby state, the target performance, that is, the notification performance is executed. It is supposed to be done.

<Other game machines>
Note that the slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to the medals, and the gaming medium is The input is made from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device with a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals or a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning). , includes inputting electronic data, and paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

<Summary of embodiments>
In gaming machines, when starting an AT or a pseudo-bonus, there is a game feature that allows the player to aim at a specific symbol (for example, 7 symbols, etc.). For example, in JP-A-2015-223235, a pseudo bonus is given not only when a specific symbol combination is displayed, but also when a specific symbol combination is not displayed due to failure to press the specific symbol. A gaming machine to be started is disclosed.

However, the gameplay shown in the above-mentioned literature has a problem in that the exhilarating feeling of matching the symbols and the fun of clicking the symbols are lost.

The present embodiment has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine where you can feel the exhilaration of aligning symbols and the fun of eye-catching when starting an advantageous state such as AT or a pseudo bonus.

(1) According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) that determines internal winning combinations based on lottery information;
stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
A gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the gaming state;
A production means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, first sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The gaming state includes an AT state (for example, an AT state) that notifies an operation mode corresponding to the internal winning combination,
The production means is a means capable of executing a symbol suggestion production (for example, aim production, suggestion production, etc.) that suggests stopping a predetermined symbol (for example, 72 symbol, etc.),
The game state control means is a means for starting the AT state when the suggested predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a game in which the presentation means executes the symbol suggestion presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 15). ),
The game state control means is a means for not starting the AT state if the suggested predetermined symbol is not stopped and displayed in a game in which the presentation means has executed the symbol suggestion presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 15). ,
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, even if the player misses the eye press, the player can shift to the standby state, thereby reducing the feeling of losing money and enjoying the feeling of a bonus that requires the conventional eye press. In other words, the player can feel the exhilaration of aligning the symbols.

Note that the term "predetermined symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and the phrase "predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a predetermined symbol combination.

In the first basic configuration above,
The game state control means is a means for starting a standby state (for example, a standby state) when the suggested predetermined symbol is not stopped and displayed in a game in which the production means has executed the symbol suggestion production (for example, , Figure 15, etc.),
This is assumed to be a preferred configuration A0.

In the above preferred configuration A0,
The gaming state control means is a means for continuing the standby state for at least a predetermined period (for example, 10 games, etc.),
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the symbol suggestion presentation after continuing for the predetermined period.
This is a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, compensation can be made by ensuring the standby state for a predetermined period.
In the above preferred configuration A0 or A1,
The gaming state includes a preparation state (for example, a target production preparation state),
The presentation means is capable of executing the symbol suggestion presentation in the preparation state,
The standby state is a gaming state that is less advantageous than the preparation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15),
This is a preferred configuration A2.

According to preferred configuration A2, when the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, there is a concern that the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, and therefore there is a concern that the degree of advantage of the standby state is lower than that of the preparation state, thereby preventing the prolongation of the standby state. I can do it.

In the above preferred configuration A2,
The AT state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the preparation state.
This is a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the AT state as a goal, and further to improve the desire to participate in eye-catching.

In the above preferred configuration A2 or A3,
The gaming state control means is means for continuing the preparation state until the presentation means executes the symbol suggestion presentation for the first time.
This is assumed to be a preferred configuration A4.

According to the preferred configuration A4, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the period until the first symbol suggestion effect occurs.

(2) According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) that determines internal winning combinations based on lottery information;
Stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
A gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the gaming state;
Production means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, first sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, etc.) that executes production;
A value imparting means for imparting value (for example, main control unit 300, medal payout processing, etc.);
A game machine comprising:
The gaming state includes an AT state (for example, an AT state) that notifies an operation mode corresponding to the internal winning combination,
The production means is a means capable of executing a symbol suggestion production (for example, aim production, suggestion production, etc.) that suggests stopping a predetermined symbol (for example, 72 symbol, etc.),
The game state control means is configured to control when the suggested predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in a game in which the presentation means executes the symbol suggestion presentation (hereinafter referred to as the first game) (hereinafter referred to as the first game). ), means for starting the AT state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15),
The game state control means is a means for not starting the AT state when the suggested predetermined symbol is not stopped and displayed in the first game (hereinafter referred to as the second case). 15 etc.),
The value that the value giving means gives in the first case in the first game is the same as the value that the value giving means gives in the second case in the first game (for example, 16, 17, etc.),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, players who are not good at hitting the eyes can still successfully hit the eyes if they fail to hit the eyes while being able to enjoy the feeling of a bonus that requires the traditional eye pressing. Since the same profit is given as if the player had played the game, the player will not suffer any loss in the game.

Note that the term "predetermined symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and the phrase "predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a predetermined symbol combination. Furthermore, the value imparting means corresponds to, but is not limited to, a medal payout process that imparts gaming media such as medals or electronically stored gaming value (for example, one medal, two medals, etc.). Even when this is displayed, it means that the player is given the value of being able to play the game again with the same number of bets. Furthermore, even when BB is internally won and the BB symbol is displayed, it means that the value of ``the BB gaming state can be started'' is given. In addition, even if you are a loser who does not win any of the winning hands, the value of "0 coins (more precisely, if you play with a bet of 3, minus 3 coins)" is given to you, and the value giving method This includes not only the provision of positive value but also the provision of negative value as a result of the game.

In the above second basic configuration,
In the first case, the first winning combination (for example, a combination of seven and one card winning combination) is displayed,
In the second case, a second hand (for example, an irregular one-card hand) is displayed,
The internal winning result determining means determines an internally winning winning combination in which the first winning combination and the second winning combination are won at the same time (for example, one-card winning combination 1-5 (one card in the middle row)) in the first game. It is a means of determining
The value that the value giving means gives when the first winning combination is displayed in the first game (for example, one medal payout) is the value that the value giving means gives when the first winning combination is displayed in the first game. The value is the same as the value given when a winning combination is displayed (for example, paying out one medal) (for example, Figures 16 and 17),
This is a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, the same profit can be obtained whether the first winning combination wins or the second winning combination, so the player does not feel disappointed.

In preferred configuration B1,
In the second case, the gaming state control means is means for starting a standby state;
A game machine characterized by:

In the second basic configuration or preferred configuration B1,
In the second case, the gaming state control means is means for starting a standby state;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B2.

In preferred configuration B2,
The gaming state control means is means for continuing the standby state for at least a predetermined period (for example, 10 games, etc.),
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the symbol suggestion presentation after continuing for the predetermined period.
This is a preferred configuration B3.

According to preferred configuration B3, compensation can be made by ensuring the standby state for a predetermined period.

In preferred configuration B2 or B3,
The gaming state includes a preparation state (for example, a target performance preparation state),
The presentation means is capable of executing the symbol suggestion presentation in the preparation state,
The standby state is a gaming state that is less advantageous than the preparation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15),
This is a preferred configuration B4.

According to preferred configuration B4, when the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, there is a concern that the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, so there is a concern that the degree of advantage of the standby state is lower than that of the preparation state, thereby preventing the degree of prolongation of the standby state. I can do it.

In preferred configuration B4,
The AT state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the preparation state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B5.

According to the preferred configuration B5, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the AT state as a goal, and further to improve the desire to participate in eye-catching.

In preferred configurations B3, B4 or B5,
The gaming state control means is means for continuing the preparation state until the presentation means executes the symbol suggestion presentation for the first time.
This is a preferred configuration B6.

According to the preferred configuration B6, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the period until the first symbol suggestion effect occurs.

(3) According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
Internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, winning winning combination internal lottery processing,
stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
A gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the gaming state;
A production means (for example, first sub-control unit 400, first sub-control unit 500, production image display device 157, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The internal winning combinations include a first winning combination (e.g., a 7-card combination) whose winning result cannot be carried over to the next game or later, and a bonus combination (e.g., BB) whose winning result can be carried over to the next game or later. Includes
The gaming state includes an AT state (for example, an AT state) that notifies an operation mode corresponding to the internal winning combination,
The performance means is capable of executing a notification performance (for example, a 7 aim performance, a suggestion performance, etc.) that notifies information regarding the internally elected role,
The gaming state control means is a means for starting the AT state when a first symbol (for example, a 72 symbol) corresponding to the first combination is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 15),
The game state control means is a means for not starting the AT state when the first symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 15),
When the first symbol is stopped and displayed, the entered prize determining means determines whether the first winning combination is won (for example, a winning combination of 7 and 1 card);
The presentation means is a means for executing the notification presentation at a first frequency (for example, 0%, etc.) when the bonus combination is determined as an internally won combination;
The presentation means is means for executing the notification presentation at a second frequency (for example, 100%, etc.) higher than the first frequency when the first role is determined as an internally elected role.
This is the third basic configuration.

According to the third basic structure, while you can enjoy the feeling of a bonus that requires a conventional hit, small winnings that cannot be carried over from the next game onwards are more effective than bonus winnings that can be carried over from the next game onwards. By increasing the frequency of performances, it is possible to reduce the risk of missing small roles.

Note that the term "first symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and the expression "the first symbol is stopped and displayed" includes the first symbol combination.

In the third basic configuration above,
The notification performance is a pattern suggestion performance (for example, an aim performance) that suggests a pattern of a stop target,
The production means is configured to produce a specific symbol suggestion which is the symbol suggestion production that suggests stopping a specific symbol corresponding to the bonus symbol at the first frequency when the bonus symbol is determined as an internally won symbol. It is a means to execute the performance (for example, Fig. 19, etc.),
The production means is a first symbol suggestion production that is the symbol suggestion production that suggests stopping the first symbol at the second frequency when the first symbol is determined as an internally won symbol. (e.g., FIG. 19),
This is a preferred configuration C1.

According to the preferred configuration C1, the eye-pressing operation can be facilitated by direct and specific symbol suggestion presentation.

Note that "a specific symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and "a specific symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a specific symbol combination.

In a preferred configuration C1,
The game state control means is a means for starting the AT state when the suggested first symbol is stopped and displayed in a game in which the production means executes the first symbol suggestion production (for example, , Figure 15),
The game state control means does not start the AT state and enters a standby state (e.g. , standby state) (for example, FIG. 15),
The gaming state control means is means for starting a bonus gaming state (for example, BB gaming state) when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 10(a) etc.),
This is a preferred configuration C2.

According to the preferred configuration C2, even if the user makes a mistake in pressing the button, the user can shift to the standby state, thereby reducing the feeling of loss.

In a preferred configuration C2,
The gaming state control means is means for continuing the standby state for at least a predetermined period (for example, 10 games, etc.),
The presentation means is a means capable of executing the first symbol suggestion presentation after continuing for the predetermined period.
This is a preferred configuration C3.

According to the preferred configuration C3, compensation is possible by ensuring the standby state for a predetermined period.

In a preferred configuration C2 or C3,
The gaming state includes a preparation state (for example, a target production preparation state),
The presentation means is capable of executing the first symbol suggestion presentation in the preparation state,
The standby state is a gaming state that is less advantageous than the preparation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 15),
This is a preferred configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, if the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, there is a concern that the degree of advantage of the standby state is high, so there is a concern that the degree of advantage of the standby state is lower than that of the preparation state, thereby preventing the degree of prolongation of the standby state. I can do it.

In a preferred configuration C4,
The AT state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the preparation state.
This is a preferred configuration C5.

According to the preferred configuration C5, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the AT state as a goal, and further to improve the desire to participate in eye-catching.

In a preferred configuration C4 or C5,
The gaming state control means is means for continuing the preparation state until the presentation means executes the first symbol suggestion presentation for the first time.
This is a preferred configuration C6.

According to the preferred configuration C6, it is possible to improve the desire to participate in the period until the first first symbol suggestion performance occurs.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications may be made, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are those described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

[Second embodiment]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the lottery result and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out any money.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 22 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 23 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 22 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three vertical directions through a reel window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, making a total of nine symbols visible. . To explain specifically using FIG. 24(a), the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 ( The symbol displayed at position 2 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 2 is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed at the bottom row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the left reel symbol. The symbols displayed on the lower reel 111, the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 4) are the upper symbols of the middle reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the diagram; symbol position 5). The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) are the symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel, and the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 ( The symbol displayed at position 7 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 7) is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the symbol displayed on the right reel. The symbols displayed in the middle reel symbol and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 9) are called the right reel lower symbol, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is displayed in the reel window 113. Throughout, three reels are displayed vertically on each reel 110 to 112, nine in total. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

In this embodiment, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at the stop position of symbols that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and is a line that is set at the stop position of the symbols that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113. This is the line on which it is judged. This winning line L1 is shown in FIG. 24(a). A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet machine, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, the winning line 114 is not activated, and when the number of inserted medals is three, the winning line 114 is not activated. 114 becomes valid. When the winning line 114 becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a winning line that drops to the right, which is made up of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the winning lines rising to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the

The medal insertion buttons (also referred to as bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 will be referred to as bet operations, and the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In this embodiment, a light emitting body (referred to as a bet button lamp) is provided inside the bet buttons 130 to 132, and when the bet buttons 130 to 132 can be operated, the light emitting body is turned on to notify the player. I can let you know. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is called the "order push operation order" or simply "order push", and the operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called the "middle push operation". The operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." In this embodiment, a light emitting body (referred to as a stop button lamp) is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body is turned on and the player can be informed.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.
The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A title panel 160 and a sound hole 143 are provided at the top of the front door 102.

A liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 is provided in an area including the reel window 113 and its surroundings. Of these, the area inside the reel window 113 (the area covering the reel window 113) is a so-called transmissive liquid crystal that allows the reels 110 to 112 to be viewed through the reel window 113.

FIG. 23 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, there is a first sub-control board that stores therein a first sub-control board constituting the first sub-control unit 400. A board storage case 220 is provided. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and powers each of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplies to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and a second sub-control board constituting the second sub-control unit 500 is housed above the liquid crystal display device 157. A second sub-board case 230 and an upper speaker 272 are provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal receiving tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

The PUSH button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In this embodiment, based on the operation of the PUSH button 192, the presence or absence of a bonus award is notified in a presentation that suggests a bonus offer, and the type of bonus to be awarded is notified. In this embodiment, a light emitting body (referred to as a PUSH button lamp) is provided inside the PUSH button 192, and when the PUSH button 192 can be operated (can be accepted as a valid operation), the light emitting body is turned on. The player can be notified by letting the player know.

Referring to FIGS. 22 and 23, the liquid crystal display device 157 includes a transmissive color liquid crystal panel 157A equipped with a color filter, and a backlight 157B that illuminates the color liquid crystal panel 157A with white light from the back side. It is a liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal panel 157A is a rectangular panel that extends to both the inner region and the outer region of the reel window 113, and a well-known liquid crystal panel can be used. The liquid crystal panel 157A includes, for example, R, G, and B (red, green, and blue) filters for each pixel, and also has a liquid crystal between transparent substrates such as glass on which signal lines, switching elements, pixel electrodes, etc. are formed. A liquid crystal layer is formed by enclosing the liquid crystal layer, and this liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between polarizing plates. Although the liquid crystal panel 157A may be of a normally white type, it is of a normally black type in this embodiment.

The backlight 157B includes a light guide plate, a light source such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate, an optical member such as a diffusion sheet, and the like. The light source is arranged, for example, along the edge of the light guide plate, and the light propagating inside the light guide plate is reflected to the liquid crystal panel 157A. In the case of this embodiment, the backlight 157 has an opening 157b formed in the inner region of the reel window 113 and penetrating in the thickness direction, so that the player can view each reel 110 to 111 without using a light guide plate or the like. is visible. In this embodiment, backlights provided in each of the reels 110 to 112 are used to illuminate the portion where the liquid crystal panel 157A and the opening 157b overlap from behind. Since the reel band has a white color (or a milky white color), each reel 110 to 112 can realize illumination that is not much different from the backlight 157, and the backlight of each reel 110 to 112 is one part of the backlight 157. or the entirety thereof can also be referred to as a backlight unit.

In the case of this embodiment, the opening 157b is a single rectangle whose outline matches the reel window 113, but three openings corresponding to the reels 110 to 112 are arranged so as to fill the gaps between the reels 110 to 112. It may also be a rectangle. The clarity of images displayed in the gaps between reels can be improved.

By blocking the transmission of light in the liquid crystal panel 157A, it appears to the player that a black image is being displayed. Furthermore, by transmitting backlight light equally in R, G, and B, it appears to the player that a white image is being displayed. Displaying a white image can also be said to be a state in which the transparency of the liquid crystal panel 157A is increased, and when R, G, and B are each controlled to the maximum brightness, the light transmittance is the highest. It can be said that it is a state. The display of black, white, or other colors can be controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The operation of this liquid crystal display device 157 will be explained using FIGS. 24(b) to 24(d). This figure is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 24(b) shows the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 when power is not supplied to the slot machine 100. As described above, in the case of this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 157 is a normally black type liquid crystal display, and when the power is off, it appears to the player that a black image is displayed, and the reels 110 to 112 is in a state where it is difficult to see.

FIG. 24(c) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157. This figure shows that the entire liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display images. At this time, in the area inside the reel window 113, light etc. from the reels 110 to 112 serve as a backlight, and the image on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes visible in this area. However, due to the image display on the liquid crystal display device 157, the visibility of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is reduced (they become difficult to see).

FIG. 24(d) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 that is different from FIG. 24(c). In this figure, the area inside the reel window 113 is different from the example in (c) above. Specifically, by displaying a white image in the area inside the reel window 113, visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is ensured. In this embodiment, this state occurs after medals are inserted within one game. That is, in order to ensure the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, the state shown in FIG. 24(d) is maintained at least from the time when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating until they stop.

As described above, in this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 157 is provided with an area that covers the reel window 113, displays a white image to make the reels 110 to 112 visible, and displays an image other than white. In this case, the visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is reduced. In order to improve the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, it is possible to set the transmittance of each pixel that makes up the image of the area covering the reel window 113, and the transmittance is set to 100% (transparent state). It's okay.

Note that the device for displaying images is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, etc. It may be a display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the entirety can be viewed by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 25. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. However, in this embodiment, data is stored in a non-volatile manner. A ROM, which is a storage device that has a storage area for temporarily storing data, and a RAM, which is a storage device that has a storage area that temporarily stores data, are used together.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, the PUSH button 192 sensor, etc.) are monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and are used to insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects input operation when inputting as . The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 339 (notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored tokens display 125, game information display 126 and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, game medal input possible lamp 124, bet button lamp, reel backlight, stop button 137 to 139 lamps, PUSH button lamp, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 423, and the CPU 404 monitors the detection result of the door sensor 421 that detects the opening of the front door 102.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs display control of the effect image display device 157.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each reel 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 26. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (nine types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a "bell symbol," the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "watermelon symbol," and the number 1 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay symbol." ” are arranged respectively.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 27 to 30. In addition, this figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), symbol combinations on the winning line 114 corresponding to each winning combination, payouts, names, and notes of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include replay combinations 1 to 18 and small combinations 1 to 54. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, replaying combinations 1 to 18 (replay) are distinguished from winning combinations and are called "activation combinations" as replaying combinations that can be played again without inserting new medals. There are cases. In this embodiment, "winning" includes a case where a symbol combination of an active combination that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, for example, re-gaming combinations 1 to 18. This includes winning prizes.

Replay roles 1 to 18 (replay) are winning roles (operating roles) that allow you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize, and the bets set for the game are You can play the next game with a number, and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. For example, the replay combination 1 is "Replay-Replay-Replay". In addition, re-gaming roles 1 and 2 are "normal replay", re-gaming role 3 is "right blue replay", re-gaming role 4 is "middle right blue replay", re-gaming role 5 is "left and right blue replay", and re-gaming role 3 is "right blue replay". Role 6 is "left center right blue replay", replay role 7 is "left center blue replay", replay role 8 is "left blue replay", replay role 9 to 11 is "BAR removed replay", replay role 12 is sometimes referred to as a "BAR replay," replay winning combinations 13 to 16 are sometimes referred to as a "Peach 7 loss replay," and replay winning combinations 17 and 18 are sometimes referred to as a "Peach 7 replay." Hereinafter, replay combinations 3 to 8 may be collectively referred to as "Blue 7 Replay."

In addition, "BAR-BAR-BAR", which is the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination 12, is a symbol combination of pseudo RB, "BAR-Seven 2-BAR", which is the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination 17, and the symbol combination of the re-gaming combination 18. The symbol combination "Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2" is a pseudo BB symbol combination.

Minor winning combinations 1 to 54 are winning winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIGS. 28 to 30. Further, the corresponding number of coins to be paid out is as shown in FIGS. 28 to 30.

For example, minor roles 1 and 2 are each “weak cherry,” minor roles 3 and 4 are each “strong cherry,” minor role 5 is “watermelon,” minor role 6 is “bell,” and minor roles are each “strong cherry.” 7 to 54 are sometimes referred to as a "one-card hand."

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 31 and 32. FIGS. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing the types, names, and notes of internal winning combinations.

31 and 32 show 20 types of internal winning combinations (condition device numbers 1 to 20) that are combinations of the combinations described in FIGS. 27 to 30. The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery (internal lottery) at the time of the game start operation.

Here, we will outline the winning probability of the internal winning combination.

The winning probability of each internal winning combination is determined by converting numerical data corresponding to the range of lottery data associated with each internal winning combination to numerical data within the range of random numbers obtained during the internal lottery described later (in this embodiment). 65536). The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each internal winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In reality, this lottery data has settings 1 to 6 with different winning probabilities for at least one internal winning combination, and game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings. I can do it.

Condition device number 1 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either replay combination 1 or 2 (normal replay) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 2 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, and 3 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of success in hitting the Seven 1 symbol on the right reel 112), the replay winning combination 3 (right blue 7 replay) will be won, and the right If it is the first stop, but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (in the case of a failure to press the 71 symbol), a replay combination 1 or a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won. In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 3 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, and 4 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of successful eye-pressing of the 7 1 symbol on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112), the replay winning combination 4 (middle right blue 7 replay) If you win a prize, but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable even though it is the first stop on the right (in the case of a failure to hit the 71 symbol on the middle reel 111 or the right reel 112), re-gaming role 1 or re-gaming role 2 (usually Replay) to win a prize. In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 4 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, and 5 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (if the 71 symbol on the left reel 110 and right reel 112 is successfully hit), you will win the replay combination 5 (left and right blue 7 replay). On the other hand, if it is the first right stop but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (in the case of failure to press the 71 symbol on the left reel 110 or right reel 112), replay winning combination 1 or replay winning combination 2 (normal replay) ) to win a prize. In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 5 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, and 6 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of a successful hit of the Seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110, middle reel 110 and right reel 112), re-gaming combination 6 (left center right If you win a prize (Blue 7 Replay), but the right first stop occurs but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (if you fail to hit the 71 symbol on the left reel 110, middle reel 110 or right reel 112), replay. Winning a prize in winning combination 1 or replay winning combination 2 (normal replay). In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 6 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, and 7 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of a successful eye press of the 71 symbol on the left reel 110 and middle reel 111), the replay winning combination 7 (left middle blue 7 replay) While winning, if the right first stop is not suitable timing of the stop operation (in case of failure to hit the 71 symbol on the left reel 110 or middle reel 111), re-gaming role 1 or re-gaming role 2 (usually Replay) to win a prize. In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Condition device number 7 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, and 8 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (if the 71 symbol on the left reel 110 is successfully hit), the replay winning combination 8 (left blue 7 replay) will be won, while the right If it is the first stop but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (in the case of failure to hit the 71 symbol on the left reel 110), a re-gaming combination 1 or a re-gaming combination 2 (normal replay) is won. In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

For the above condition device numbers 2 to 7, operation conditions (in this case, press order and operation timing) for winning the blue 7 replay (any of replay combinations 3 to 8) are defined. That is, if the right first stop and the seven 1 symbol are successfully pushed, the blue 7 replay will be won. In the following explanation, the condition device numbers 2 to 7 may be collectively referred to as press order symbol blue 7 replay.

Condition device number 8 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, 9 to 12 are internally won in duplicate. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of success in pressing the BAR symbols on the left reel 110, middle reel 110, and right reel 112), the replay winning combination 12 (BAR replay) If a prize is won and the timing of the stop operation is not suitable even though the first stop is on the right (in the case of failure to press the BAR symbol on the left reel 110, middle reel 110 or right reel 112), re-gaming role 1, re-gaming role 2 (normal replay) or replay winning combinations 9 to 11 (BAR missed replay). In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won. In addition, in the following explanation, the condition device number 8 may be referred to as press order symbol BAR replay.

Incidentally, condition device number 8 is a condition device for winning a pseudo bonus (pseudo RB), and when winning the replay combination 12 (BAR replay), a pseudo RB game is started.

Condition device number 9 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, 13 to 15, and 18 are internally won in duplicate. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of a successful hit of the 7 2 symbols on the left reel 110, middle reel 110 and right reel 112), replay combination 18 (Peach 7 replay) ), while the first stop on the right occurs but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable (in the case of failure to hit the 72 symbol on the left reel 110, middle reel 110 or right reel 112), re-gaming combination 1, Win replay combination 2 (normal replay) or replay combinations 13 to 15 (peach 7 is replay). In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Note that condition device number 9 is a condition device for winning a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB), and if the replay combination 18 (Peach 7 replay) is won, a pseudo BB game is started.

Condition device number 10 is a condition device in which re-gaming combinations 1, 2, 9, 11, 16, and 17 are duplicated and internally won. In this condition device, if the right first stop and the timing of the stop operation are suitable (in the case of a successful hit of the 7 2 symbol on the middle reel 111, the BAR symbol on the left reel 110 and the right reel 112), replay combination 17 ( If you win a prize (Peach 7 Replay), but the timing of the stop operation is not suitable even though the first stop is on the right (if you fail to hit the 7 2 symbol on reel 111, the BAR symbol on left reel 110 or right reel 112), Replay winning combination 1, replay winning combination 2 (normal replay), replay winning combinations 9 and 11 (BAR is a replay of a loss), or replay combination 16 (a peach 7 is a replay of a loss). In addition, in the case of the first stop on the left or the first stop in the middle, a replay combination 2 (normal replay) is won.

Note that condition device number 10 is a condition device for winning a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB), and when replay combination 17 (peach 7 replay) is won, a pseudo BB game is started. In addition, in the following explanation, the condition device numbers 9 and 10 may be collectively referred to as press order symbol peach 7 replay.

Conditional device number 11 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 1 and 2 are duplicated and internally won. In this conditional device, either the small winning combination 1 or 2 (weak cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Conditional device number 12 is a conditional device in which small winning combinations 3 and 4 are internally won. In this conditional device, either the small winning combination 3 or 4 (strong cherry) is won depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Condition device number 13 is a condition device in which the small winning combination 5 is internally won alone. With this conditional device, a small winning combination of 5 (watermelon) is won.

Condition device number 14 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left, center, and right, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the left, any of the small roles 23, 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37-40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the first left stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the first left stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 15 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6-22, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, and 52 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left and right, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of left, center, right, one of the small winning combinations 7 to 22 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the left, you may win any of the small winnings 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52. be. That is, if the stop operation is the first left stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the first left stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 16 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, and 54 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle and left, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of center, right, left, and left, one of the small winning combinations 23 to 38 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop in the middle, small winnings 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21, 22, 39, 40, 43, 44, 49, 50, 53, 54 You may win a prize in one of the following. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the middle first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 17 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6, 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 23-38, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, and 52 are internally won. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of center, right, and left, a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of middle, left, and right, one of the small winning combinations 23 to 38 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the middle first stop, you may win any of the small winnings 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 41, 42, 45-48, 51, 52. be. That is, if the stop operation is the middle first stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the middle first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 18 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21 to 24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37 to 54 are internally won in duplicate. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle, a small winning combination of 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, center, and left, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the right, any of the small winnings 7, 8, 11, 12, 17, 18, 21-24, 27, 28, 33, 34, 37, 38 You may win a prize. That is, if the stop operation is the first right stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the right first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 19 is a condition device in which small winning combinations 6 to 7, 12 to 13, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29 to 32, 35, 36, 39 to 54 are internally won. In this conditional device, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, center, and left, a small winning combination of 6 (bell) is won. Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of right, left, and middle, one of the small winning combinations 39 to 54 will be won. Also, if you perform a stop operation other than the first stop on the right, you may win any of the small winnings 9, 10, 13-16, 19, 20, 25, 26, 29-32, 35, 36. be. That is, if the stop operation is the first right stop, 8 or 1 coin will be paid out, and if it is other than the right first stop, 1 or 0 coins will be paid out.

Condition device number 20 is a condition device in which the small winning combination 6 is internally won alone. With this conditional device, a small win of 6 (bell) is won.

The above-mentioned condition device numbers 14 to 19 each have a set operation condition (in this case, the order of pressing, hereinafter, the order of pressing the correct answer) for winning the bell (small winning combination 6). In the following explanation, condition device numbers 14 to 19 may be collectively referred to as the push order bell. In the case where these condition device numbers 14 to 19 are internally won, if the stop operation matches the pressing order of each correct answer, a bell (minor win 6) is won. On the other hand, if the stopping operation does not match the correct pressing order, internally won one-card winning combinations other than Bell (small winning number 6) are stopped preferentially. In addition, with the above configuration, if the stop operation does not match the correct press order, there may be a loss. It may be configured such that a prize is always won for some role.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and transitions of gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 33 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

The slot machine 100 has a normal state, a chance zone (sometimes referred to as CZ) state, and an AT state. Further, the AT state is subdivided into an AT normal state, a pseudo BB state, a specialized state, and an ending state. In addition, in this embodiment, an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section are provided separately from the above three gaming states. The advantageous section consists of most of the period of the normal state, the CZ state, and the AT state, and the non-advantageous section consists of a part of the period of the normal state.

The CZ state and the AT state are states in which the operation navigation described later is executed and information that is advantageous to the player is notified, so they can be said to be AT states in a broad sense (also referred to as specific gaming states). In this embodiment, a net increase number counter is provided to count the number of medals acquired in the CZ state and the AT state. In the process of updating the net increase number counter (counting timing will be described later), in the game, (1) If the number of coins to be paid out > the number of coins put in, the additional value = number of coins paid out - the number of coins inserted, and the added value is added to the value of the net increase number counter. On the other hand, if (2) the number of coins to be paid out≦the number of coins put in, the subtraction value=the number of coins put in−the number of coins paid out, and the subtracted value is subtracted from the value of the net increase number counter.

Although the net increase number counter in this embodiment is provided in the main control section 300, the present invention is not limited thereto. It may be provided in the first sub-control unit 400. Alternatively, it may be provided in both the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and may be counted by both.

Note that the net increase number counter may be set so as not to fall below 0, or may be set so as to fall below 0. In the former case, even if the number of medals acquired is negative, it will actually remain 0, and when a payout is made, the amount paid out will be added, and the added value will be displayed on the acquired number display d1, which will be described later. In the latter case, when the number of medals acquired becomes negative, the counter is also updated to a negative value, and even if a payout is made, the number of acquired medals display d1 may not be updated until the counter becomes 0 (even if the counter is negative, the number of acquired medals is displayed. d1 is fixedly displayed as 0).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a MY counter is provided that counts the number of medals acquired in an advantageous section, in addition to the net increase number counter. In the MY counter update process (count timing will be described later), in the game, (1) If the number of coins paid out > the number of coins inserted, the additional value = the number of coins paid out - the number of coins inserted, and the additional value is added to the value of the MY counter. , (2) If the number of coins to be paid out≦the number of coins to be put in, the subtraction value=the number of coins to be put in−the number of coins to be paid out, and the subtraction value is subtracted from the value of the MY counter. Note that, as a result of the update, if the value of the MY counter is <0, the value of the MY counter is set to 0. That is, the value of the MY counter never becomes negative.

The MY counter in this embodiment is provided in the main control unit 300, but is not limited thereto. It may be provided in the first sub-control unit 400.

In other words, the number of medals acquired can be said to be the gaming value given to the player, and in a broad sense, it may be the number of medals acquired from other game media, electronically stored gaming value, etc. .

FIG. 33 shows the three gaming states described above and the subdivided states of the AT state, and these transition conditions are indicated on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is established, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

FIG. 33 shows that if the player wins the CZ lottery in the initial state, which is the normal state, the player will move to the CZ state, and if the player wins the AT lottery in the initial state, which is the normal state, the player will move to the AT state. has been done. In the normal state, a CZ lottery and an AT lottery are performed according to the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. If the player wins the CZ lottery, the player shifts to the CZ state, and if the player wins the AT lottery, the player shifts to the specialized AT state. Note that when AT is won, a freeze occurs, and the player can recognize the transition to the AT state by the occurrence of the freeze.

The CZ state is a gaming state that continues for 20 games. In the CZ state, in the 1st game to the 15th game, a point lottery is executed according to the internal winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process. The total value (maximum 100 Pt) of points (hereinafter sometimes referred to as Pt) acquired from the first game to the 15th game corresponds to the AT winning probability. For example, if the total value of points earned from the 1st game to the 15th game is 60Pt, the probability of transitioning to the AT state is 60%. Whether or not to shift to the AT state is based on the lottery result based on the Pt value. Specifically, as a result of the continuous performance executed from the 16th game to the 20th game, it is notified whether or not the AT state will be entered in the 20th game, which is the final game.

FIG. 33 shows that if the player wins the AT lottery in the CZ state, the state shifts to the AT state, and if the player does not win the AT lottery, the player shifts to the normal state. Note that when transitioning from the CZ state to the AT state, the transition is made to the AT normal state of the AT state.

The AT state consists of one set of 40 games. In the AT normal state, a stock lottery, a pseudo bonus lottery, and a specialized state lottery are executed according to the internal winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process. In addition, in the AT normal state, if Blue 7 Replay wins, a stock lottery, a pseudo bonus lottery, and a special state lottery are executed. In the lottery when the blue 7 replay wins, the more 71 symbols displayed on the active line, the more advantageous benefits and privileges are given to the player. If you win the stock lottery, you will be awarded AT games of the winning number of sets (40 games x n, where n is a natural number).

In the AT normal state, if the pseudo bonus lottery is won, the state shifts to the pseudo BB state. In the pseudo BB state, if you win the push order symbol BAR replay or the push order symbol peach 7 replay, you will receive the replay winning combination 12 (BAR replay) which is a pseudo regular bonus (pseudo RB) or the replay which is a pseudo big bonus (pseudo BB). When winning the game combination 17 or 18 (Peach 7 Replay), a pseudo BB game or a pseudo RB game is started. The pseudo BB game is more advantageous to the player than the pseudo RB game. For example, in a pseudo BB game, the number of navigation operations is greater than in a pseudo RB game, or in a pseudo BB game, the number of games and the number of medals to be paid as an end condition are greater than in a pseudo RB game. In the pseudo BB state, if the termination condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the AT normal state.

In the AT normal state, if the special state lottery is won, the AT shifts to the special state. In the specialized state, the probability of winning the stock lottery and the number of stocks to be awarded are higher than in the AT normal state. In the specialized state, if the termination condition is satisfied, the AT normal state is entered.

Also, in the AT normal state, pseudo BB state, or specialized state, if the value of the MY counter becomes 2000 or more, the state shifts to the ending state, and in the ending state, if the value of the MY counter becomes 2400 or more, the AT state ends. , transition to normal state.

FIG. 33 shows that in the AT state, when the stock number becomes 0 or when the ending state ends, the state shifts to the normal state. When the AT state shifts to the normal state, the MY counter is reset together with the net increase number counter because the shift is to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. In addition, when shifting from the CZ state to the normal state, since the state shifts to the normal state in the advantageous section, the MY counter is not reset, but the net increase number counter is reset.

<Operation navigation>
In the above CZ state and AT state, operation navigation is executable. The operation navigation is a notification effect that notifies the stopping operation mode (information regarding the content of the stopping operation), and it has become possible to bring an advantageous result to the player by performing the stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation. There is. Operation navigation can be roughly divided into (1) push order navigation that provides information including the operation order (press order) of stop operations, and (2) information that includes operation timing (for example, stop target symbols, etc.). There is a pattern navigation to inform you. In the case of this embodiment, the symbol navigation includes a symbol navigation that shows the Seven 1 symbol, a symbol navigation that shows the Seven 2 symbol, and a symbol navigation that shows the BAR symbol. In other words, the push order navigation is an operation navigation that does not include the press timing, and the symbol navigation is an operation navigation that includes the press timing.

Specifically, the push order navigation of this embodiment includes (1) a push order navigation that notifies you of the correct operation order to win the small winning combination 6 (bell) if you win the push order bell; (2) If you win internally for the push order symbol blue 7 replay, the push order navigation will inform you of the correct operation order to win the blue 7 replay, (3) If you win the push order symbol BAR replay internally, you will win the bar replay. (4) Push order navigation that informs you of the correct operation order to win the peach 7 replay if you win internally in the push order symbol peach 7 replay, (5) There is a push order navigation (fake push order navigation) that informs you of the operation order when the re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are internally won.

In addition, the symbol navigation of this embodiment specifically includes (1) Push order symbols A symbol that informs you of the symbol (Seven 1 symbol) for winning the blue 7 replay when the blue 7 replay is internally won; Navigation (hereinafter referred to as blue 7 symbol navigation), (2) Symbol navigation that informs you of the symbol (BAR symbol) for winning the BAR replay if you win internally in the push order symbol BAR replay (hereinafter referred to as the BAR symbol navigation) , (3) A symbol navigation (hereinafter referred to as the "Momo 7 symbol navigation") that informs you of the symbol (Seven 2 symbol) for winning the Momo 7 replay when the push order symbol Momo 7 replay is internally won, (4) Replay There is a symbol navigation (hereinafter referred to as "fake symbol navigation", and the fake push order navigation and fake symbol navigation are collectively referred to as "fake navigation") that informs you of the 71 symbol when winning combinations 1 and 2 internally. The symbol navigation is performed together with the execution of the above-described push order navigation.

In addition, the above-mentioned symbol navigation, that is, the blue 7 symbol navigation, the BAR symbol navigation, the peach 7 symbol navigation, and the fake symbol navigation are not necessarily executed when the corresponding conditional device number is won. For example, even if the push order blue 7 pattern replay is internally won, the blue 7 pattern navigation may not be executed.

The details will be described later, but regarding the blue 7 symbol navigation, there is a blue 7 symbol navigation low probability state where the probability of executing the blue 7 symbol navigation is low, and a blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state where the probability of executing the blue 7 symbol navigation is high. , exists. In the case of the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state, a first band display effect (described in detail later) is executed to notify that the blue 7 symbol navigation is in the high probability state.

In addition, regarding BAR symbol navigation and peach 7 symbol navigation (hereinafter collectively referred to as pseudo bonus symbol navigation), there is a pseudo bonus symbol navigation low probability state in which the probability of executing the pseudo bonus symbol navigation is low, and a pseudo bonus symbol navigation. There is a pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state in which the execution probability is high, and in the case of the pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state, a second band display effect is displayed to notify that the pseudo bonus symbol navigation is in the high probability state. executed. Therefore, when the second band display effect is executed, it becomes easier to win a pseudo bonus (pseudo BB, pseudo RB). The pseudo BB state described above is also a pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state.

Here, the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state continues for at least the number of guaranteed games, and after the guaranteed number of games elapses, a falling lottery is held with a predetermined probability, and if the falling lottery is won, the blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state continues. ends. The same applies to the pseudo bonus symbol navigation high probability state.

Note that instead of the pseudo bonus pattern navigation high probability state, a pseudo bonus lottery high probability state may be provided in which the probability of winning the pseudo bonus (lottery probability) is high. The pseudo-bonus lottery high probability state continues for at least the number of guaranteed games, and after the number of guaranteed games has elapsed, a falling lottery is held with a predetermined probability, and ends when a falling lottery is won. Transition to this pseudo bonus lottery high probability state is determined by a high probability transition lottery in a state that is not a pseudo bonus lottery high probability state (hereinafter also referred to as a non-high probability state). This high-probability transition lottery may be performed depending on the winning combination, or may be performed based on consecutive winnings of bells or consecutive winnings of replays.

In addition, a pseudo-bonus lottery in a non-high probability state may also be performed depending on the winning combination. For example, a pseudo-bonus lottery may be performed according to the establishment of the push order symbol Blue 7 replay in which cherry, watermelon, and blue 7 replay are stopped and displayed. You may do so. Note that the probability of winning a pseudo bonus in a pseudo bonus lottery in a non-high probability state may be determined for each winning combination. For example, in the case of watermelon, you will win with the first probability, in the case of cherry, you will win with the second probability, and in the case of the push order symbol Blue 7 replay where one blue 7 is stopped, you will win with the third probability. , in the case of a push-order symbol Blue 7 replay in which two blue 7s are stopped, you will win with the fourth probability, and in the case of a push-order symbol Blue 7 replay in which three blue 7s are stopped, you will win with the fifth probability. , the winning probability may be increased in the order of "first < second < third < fourth < fifth."

Furthermore, a pseudo-bonus lottery in a high-probability pseudo-bonus lottery state may also be performed according to winning combinations, and the probability of winning a pseudo-bonus may be determined for each winning combination. For example, in the case of watermelon, it will be won with the sixth probability higher than the first probability, and in the case of cherry, it will be won with the seventh probability higher than the second probability, and the pressing order in which one blue 7 will be stopped. In the case of symbol blue 7 replay, the eighth probability is higher than the third probability, and in the case of push order symbol blue 7 replay, the ninth probability is higher than the fourth probability. In the case of the push order symbol blue 7 replay in which three blue 7s are stopped, the player wins with the 10th probability higher than the 5th probability, and the ``6th < 7th < 8th < 9th < The probability of winning may be higher in the order of "10th".

In addition, if you win a pseudo bonus in the pseudo bonus lottery, the type of BB or RB is determined, and the state shifts to the pseudo bonus preparation state, and the preparation state continues until the condition device corresponding to BB or RB is determined. When the player stays at , and the corresponding conditional device is won, a symbol navigation that makes the player aim at the BB symbol or the RB symbol is generated, and then a pseudo bonus is started. Further, a lottery for promotion from RB to BB may be performed depending on the winning combination in the preparation state.

Note that the fake navigation is an operation navigation that is executed when the re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are internally won. This fake navigation is an operation navigation that is announced in the same manner as the push order navigation and symbol navigation that are executed when the push order symbol blue 7 replay is internally won, but it performs a stop operation according to the notification content. Even if the player wins the replay combination 1 or 2, he will not win the blue 7 replay. Fake navigation is a false navigation navigation designed to increase players' expectations. Fake Navi is executed in a game where re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are internally won, when a Fake Navi lottery is won to determine whether or not to execute Fake Navi. This is performed on the reel determined by the reel lottery to determine whether to perform symbol navigation for ~112.

Further, by providing a notification mode of a symbol navigation that may be a fake navigation and a notification mode of a symbol navigation that may not be a fake navigation, a sense of anticipation can be created when a symbol navigation occurs. For example, by adding a red effect to the blue 7 symbol navigation, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the 7 1 symbol will stop if the 7 1 symbol is operated at the appropriate timing, and that it is less likely to be a fake navigation. The presence of a blue effect on the blue 7 symbol navigation suggests that even if the 7 1 symbol is operated at the appropriate timing, the 7 1 symbol is less likely to stop than the red effect and is more likely to be a fake navigation. By doing so, the red effect has a higher expectation that the 71 symbol will be stopped, and the blue effect can make the expectation that the 71 symbol will be stopped lower than the red effect.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

Further, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals that have been inserted is determined, and the first sub-control unit 400 In response, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the internal winning combinations is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internal winning combination is activated (the flag for the internal winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control for shifting the gaming state is performed. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 35) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 36. Note that FIG. 36(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 36(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 36(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 36(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 36(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 36(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 36(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 37(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 37(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 37(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 37(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 37(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 37(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 37(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 37(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Display of number of acquired pieces in CZ state and AT state>
Next, display of the number of acquired coins in the CZ state and the AT state will be explained using FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the transition of effect images displayed on the effect image display device 157 when transitioning to the AT state or the normal state after 20 games in the CZ state. In this embodiment, the number of acquired coins d1 is not displayed in the CZ state, but the number of acquired coins d1 is displayed in the AT state (the reason will be described later). Here, the acquired number display d1 displays the value of the net increase number counter. As described above, the net increase number counter is configured to count the net increase number of sheets in the CZ state and the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 38, from the 1st game to the 15th game in the CZ state, Pt is added according to the progress of the game (results of the winning combination internal lottery process). For example, in the production example shown in FIG. 17, a value of 40Pt is displayed for the 5th game, 60Pt for the 10th game, and 5Pt for the 15th game. Therefore, in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 38, the probability of transitioning to the AT state is 75%. Next, from the 16th game to the 20th game in the CZ state, a continuous performance spanning five games is executed. Specifically, the continuous performance is a performance that indicates whether or not to transition to the AT state. In the CZ state, as shown in FIG. 38, the acquired number display d1 is not displayed.

When the result of the continuous performance in the 20th game in the CZ state is "win", the AT state is started from the next game, and the AT state performance is started and the acquired number display d1 is displayed. The first AT game shown in FIG. 38 shows a case where the value of the acquired number display d1 is 50. In other words, in this case, the number of acquired coins in the CZ state is 50 coins. Note that if the number of acquired coins in the CZ state is less than 0, the AT state effect may be started and the value of the acquired number display d1 may be set to 0 and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the continuous performance in the 20th game in the CZ state is "defeat", the normal state is started from the next game, and the performance of the normal state is started. Note that when the state changes from the CZ state to the normal state, the net increase number counter is reset to zero. Even if this net increase number counter is reset, if the advantageous section continues, the MY counter will not be reset and the count will continue; if the advantageous section also ends with the end of the CZ state, the MY counter will continue counting. The counter is also reset.

In addition, in the CZ state and the AT state, as shown in FIG. 38, operation navigation (push order navigation, symbol navigation) may be executed. The CZ 1st game and AT 1st game show the case where the push order navigation is executed and the image d2 of the push order navigation is displayed, and the CZ 10th game is the case where the push order symbol blue 7 replay is internally won and the push order navigation is executed. This shows a case where both the navigation and symbol navigation are executed, and the image d2 of the push order navigation and the image d3 of the symbol navigation are displayed.

In addition, in the CZ state of this embodiment, Pt is added from the 1st game to the 15th game, but in addition to this, the winning combinations of the winning combination internal lottery process from the 16th game to the 20th game are added. The reflected Pt may also be added.

Further, in this embodiment, the net increase in the number of coins in the CZ state and the AT state is displayed in the form of the acquired number display d1 in the AT state, but the information displayed in the AT state is not limited to the number of acquired coins. For example, the number of times the push order navigation is executed when the push order bell is internally won and the number of additional AT stocks may be displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, the condition for ending the CZ state is the completion of 20 games, but it may be other than the playing period. For example, the condition for ending the CZ state may be when the number of press order navigations executed when the press order bell is internally won reaches a predetermined number of times.

From the above, as shown in FIG. 38, the CZ state is a gaming state in which transition to the AT state is not determined from the beginning, and is continued for a predetermined period (20 games in this embodiment), and the operation navigation is also executed. Therefore, it can be said that this is a gaming state that can bring a certain amount of profit to the player, although it is smaller than the AT state. Since the CZ state is such an unstable gaming state, the player will feel uneasy if the game does not shift to the AT state, so the acquired number display d1 is hidden in the CZ state.

Note that in the CZ state, the acquired number display d1 is not displayed, but in the CZ state, an external signal regarding the increase or decrease of medals (a signal that can specify the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out) is output, and the hall computer (gaming parlor) administrator) can grasp the increase and decrease of medals in the CZ state. An external signal regarding the increase or decrease of medals is output even in the AT state, and is output even in the normal state. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed in the CZ state, but the net increase in number of sheets may be counted without executing the operation navigation in the CZ state.

<Operation navigation when winning press order symbol blue 7 replay>
Next, using FIGS. 39 to 42, an explanation will be given of the operation navigation when the push order symbol blue 7 replay is internally won in the AT state. The push order navigation of this embodiment starts execution based on a start operation (start lever operation), but the symbol navigation of this embodiment has multiple execution start points, as shown in FIGS. 39 to 42. . In addition, below, the image d2 showing the stop operation order of "right center left" in the push order navigation will be simply abbreviated as image d2, and the image d3 showing the "Seven 1 symbol" will be displayed for the left reel 110 of the symbol navigation. , simply abbreviated as image d3.

FIG. 39 shows the case where condition device number 7 is won and the push order navigation and symbol navigation are executed based on the start operation. In other words, a case is shown in which the execution of the symbol navigation is started along with the start operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 39, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation (time A1), and produces the push order navigation image d2 and the symbol navigation image d3 from the start operation time A1. It is displayed on the image display device 157. Thereby, the player can be informed that the seven 1 symbol on the left reel 110 is the target symbol for the "right middle left" stop operation and the third stop operation. Note that operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted as soon as the reels 110 to 112 start rotating.

When the player performs the stop operation and the blue 7 replay (replay combination 8) wins, the slot machine 100 performs the stock lottery, pseudo bonus lottery, or special status lottery, giving the player a chance. telop d4 indicating this is displayed. Further, when the blue 7 replay wins, an effect d5 may be generated for the stopped 7 1 symbol.

According to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 39, the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started based on the start operation, so it is possible to give time for pressing the third stop operation and prevent erroneous operations. It can be prevented.

FIG. 40 shows the case where condition device number 7 is won, the push order navigation is started based on the start operation (start lever operation), and the symbol navigation is executed based on the start of reel rotation. . In other words, this shows a case where the symbol navigation is started after the start operation and before the first stop operation. Note that since the images of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation are the same as those shown in FIG. 39, the example images after the first stop operation are omitted in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 40, the slot machine 100 generates a weight based on a start operation (time B1), and starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 at time B2 after the wait time has elapsed. Further, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the image d2 of the push order navigation from the time B1 of the start operation, and starts displaying the image d3 of the symbol navigation on the effect image display device 157 from the time B2 when the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 starts. . Note that operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted from time B2 when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating.

According to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 40, the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started after the wait that occurs based on the start operation, so it is possible to give time margin for pressing the third stop operation. It is possible to prevent erroneous operations. Further, it is possible to provide time margin for operations in the order of pressing, and it is possible to prevent erroneous operations.

FIG. 41 shows a case where condition device number 7 is won, the push order navigation is started based on the start operation (start lever operation), and the symbol navigation is executed based on the first stop operation. There is. In other words, this shows a case where the symbol navigation is started based on the first stop operation after the start operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 41, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation (time point C1), and starts displaying the push order navigation image d2 from the time point C1 of the start operation. Next, when the first stop operation is performed by the player, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the symbol navigation image d3 on the effect image display device 157 from the time point C2 of the first stop operation. Note that operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted from time point C1 when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating.

According to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 41, the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started based on the first stop operation, so it is possible to give time margin for pressing the third stop operation. , erroneous operations can be prevented.

FIG. 42 shows the case where condition device number 7 is won, the push order navigation starts to be executed based on the start operation (start lever operation), and the symbol navigation is executed during the freeze generated based on the second stop operation. Indicates when to do so. That is, after the second stop operation, a freeze is generated and the symbol navigation for the third stop operation is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation (time point D1), and starts displaying the push order navigation image d2 from the time point D1 of the start operation. Next, when the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed by the player, the slot machine 100 generates a freeze based on the time point D3 of the second stop operation, and displays the image of the symbol navigation at the time point D4 when the freeze is occurring. d3 starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157. During this freezing period, the third stop operation cannot be performed, so the player can focus on the image d3 of the symbol navigation. Thereafter, the slot machine 100 displays the symbol navigation image d3 until the freeze is released and the third stop operation is performed by the player.

Note that operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted from time C1 when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, but after a freeze occurs, operations on the stop button 137 can be accepted from time D4 when the freeze is released. It becomes.

According to the operation navigation shown in FIG. 42, the symbol navigation for the third stop reel is started while the freeze occurs after the second stop operation, so even though it is after the most recent second stop operation, It is possible to provide time for pressing the third stop operation, and it is possible to prevent erroneous operations.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, the symbol navigation is started from the time D4 when the freeze is occurring, but it may be started from the time D3 when the freeze starts. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 42, the case of symbol navigation for the third stop reel has been described, but freezing can also be applied to the case of the first stop reel and the second stop reel. In this case, (1) when executing the symbol navigation for the first stop reel, a freeze is generated based on the most recent start operation, and the symbol navigation starts to be executed during the freeze, and (2) for the second stop reel, When executing the symbol navigation, it is sufficient to generate a freeze based on the first stop operation, which is the most recent stop operation, and start executing the symbol navigation during the freeze.

In this way, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 40 to 42, while the push order navigation, which is the operation condition for the stop buttons 137 to 139, is being executed, the effect of adding the symbol navigation, which is the new operation condition, is added. By executing this, it is possible to provide a game that provides surprise when only the push order navigation occurs.

<Obi display performance>
Next, the band display effect will be explained using FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a performance mode of a band display effect, and FIG. 43(a) shows a performance mode of a band display effect in a state where the left reel 110 is rotating and the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 are stopped. FIG. 43(b) shows the performance mode of the band display performance in a state where all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Note that FIG. 43 shows an example of the performance mode of the band display performance of the game in which the push order symbol blue 7 replay is internally won in the AT state and the blue 7 symbol navigation is being executed.

The band display performance is a performance that displays predetermined information in a band-shaped area formed on the performance image display device 157 and scrolls the displayed predetermined information. The band display effects of this embodiment include a first band display effect that informs that the blue 7 symbol navigation is in a high probability state, and a second band display effect that informs that the pseudo bonus symbol navigation is in a high probability state. There is. FIG. 43 shows a performance mode of the band display performance when both the first band display performance and the second band display performance are executed simultaneously. Of course, there are cases where only either the first band display effect or the second band display effect is executed.

The first band display effect includes information indicating that the symbol navigation is in a high probability state (for example, along with the 71 symbol This is an effect in which an effect image d10 including a character (such as a character indicating an increase in appearance rate) d11 is displayed, and information d11 is scrolled from the bottom of the screen to the top. The effect image d10 is an effect image in which a plurality of pieces of the same information d11 are arranged on a band area at intervals S1. Here, at the start of the display of the first band display effect, at least one piece of information d11 of the effect image d10 is displayed so that the entire information is visible without being blocked (for example, FIG. 43(a) ) Information d11) displayed above the effect image d10.

The second band display effect indicates that the pseudo bonus symbol navigation is in a high probability state in a red translucent band area formed diagonally from the upper right edge of the screen to the lower left edge of the screen of the effect image display device 157. This is an effect in which an effect image d20 including information (for example, characters such as "Bonus High Probability Medium") d21 is displayed, and the information d21 is scrolled from the upper right to the lower left of the screen. The effect image d20 is an effect image in which a plurality of pieces of the same information d21 are arranged on a band area at a predetermined interval S2. Here, at the start of the display of the second band display effect, at least one piece of information d21 of the effect image d20 is displayed so that the entire information is visible without being blocked (for example, FIG. 43(a) ) Information d21) displayed above the effect image d20.

When at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating, the effect image d20 is displayed behind the reel window 113 in the overlapping region R1 of the effect image d20 and the reel window 113, as shown in FIG. 43(a). Ru. Thereby, the reel window 113 becomes in a state where the entire reels 110 to 112 can be viewed without being blocked by the effect image d20. On the other hand, when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the effect image d20 is displayed in front of the reel window 113 in the overlapping region R1 with the reel window 113, as shown in FIG. 43(b). Thereby, the entire effect image d20 becomes visible.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the first band display effect and the second band display effect are executed simultaneously, as shown in FIGS. 43(a) and (b), the first band display effect and the second band display effect are In the overlapping region R2 of the band display effects, the effect image d20 is displayed in front of the effect image d10. This is because while the reels 110 to 11 are rotating, the information d21 is often blocked by the reel window 113, so the information d21 is treated more favorably than the information d11, and more information than the first band display effect is displayed in the game. This is to inform the public. Furthermore, at the start of the display of the second band display effect, at least one piece of information d21 of the effect image d20 is displayed in a manner that allows the entire information to be viewed without being blocked. This is because there are many areas blocked by 113. It should be noted that a period in which scrolling is not performed for a moment may be provided at the start of displaying the second band display effect, and then scrolling may be performed, thereby making it easier to grasp the information d21. However, the method of displaying the overlapping region R2 is not limited to this, and the effect image d10 may be displayed in front of the effect image d20. In this case, since the information d11 is displayed more dominantly than the information d21, the player's awareness of the 71 symbol becomes higher.

Note that the first band display effect and the second band display effect of this embodiment are semitransparent band images, so that the image displayed behind can be visually recognized. The band display effect and the second band display effect may not be made into semi-transparent band images, and what is displayed behind them may be made invisible. Further, although the first band display effect and the second band display effect of this embodiment have the same scroll speed, they do not have to be the same.

In addition, with regard to the first band display performance and the second band display performance, an inciting performance is executed respectively. The inciting effect is a effect that suggests the execution of the first band display effect or the second band display effect. Specifically, for each stop operation, the effect image d10 of the blue semi-transparent band area or the red semi-transparent band area is displayed. This is a performance in which the display of the performance image d20 of the band area is repeatedly faded in and out, and it is a performance in which it becomes clear whether or not to execute the band display performance after the third stop operation.

This allows the player to decide whether or not to transition to the high probability state, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game each time he or she performs a stop operation.

In addition, when the first band display effect or the second band display effect ends, the effect image d10 or the effect image d20 will be hidden when the respective high probability state ends, but after the high probability state ends, the effect image d10 or the effect image d20 will be hidden. It may be hidden by the game start operation. Furthermore, in a game where the high probability state ends, the fade-in/fade-out may be repeated for each stop operation, and the display may finally be hidden after the third stop operation. Note that even if the high probability state does not end, the fade-in/fade-out may be performed, and in this case, the display will not be hidden by the third stop operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the high probability state. Note that if both high probability states end at the same time, both band display performances may become hidden at the same time. Furthermore, since there is a concern that if the items are hidden at the same time, the player's motivation will decrease, the items may be hidden at different timings. Additionally, due to the concern that if the band display suddenly disappears, the player may not notice it or misunderstand it as some kind of problem, so when the band display becomes hidden, it becomes a mist and gradually disappears. It may also be possible to include a hidden effect production such as The band display can be effectively hidden while resolving the above-mentioned concerns.

Here, the width of each reel 110 to 12 is L1, the width of the symbol navigation image is L2, the width of the push order navigation image is L3, the width of the symbol of the effect image d10 is L4, and the width of the band of the effect image d10 is N1 and the width of the band of the effect image d20 is N2, in this embodiment, the following relationships hold: (1) L1>L2>L3, (2) L2>L4, (3) N1>N2, and ( 4) The relationship S1 between the information d11 in the effect image d10>interval S2 between the information d21 in the effect image d20 holds true. According to configuration (1), the reel width is the widest, so you can concentrate on pressing the reels, and by making the width of the symbol navigation larger than the width of the push order navigation, it is easy to grasp the symbol you should aim for. effective. According to configuration (2), display can be performed in accordance with the width of the scroll area. According to the configuration (3), the effect image d10 includes text and pattern information, while the effect image d20 contains only text information, so by setting N1>N2, the information d11 in the effect image d10 is easy to see. Become. According to configuration (4), the effect image d10 includes character and symbol information, and since the information d21 may be blocked by the reels 110 to 112 while the reels are rotating, the interval S1>S2. By doing so, the design of the effect image d10 becomes easier to see, and the exposure of the information d21 can be increased.

However, the size relationship of each object described above is not limited to this. For example, the following relationships may be established: (5) L1<L2, (6) L2<L3, (7) L2<L4, (8) N1<N2, and (9) S1<S2. For example, in the case of (5), the symbols to be pressed can be highlighted and displayed, and the reels to be stopped can be highlighted. In the case of (6), the push order navigation can be emphasized, and errors in the order of stopping operations can be prevented. In the case of (7), the effect image d10 can be emphasized, and the awareness of the 71 symbol can be further raised. In the case of (8), the presence of the performance image d20 can be emphasized, and the player's awareness of the advantageous gaming state can be heightened. In the case of (9), the information d11 of the effect image d10 can be further emphasized.

Note that the display position, scroll direction, and display method of the overlapping area of the band display effect are not limited to the example of the band display effect shown in FIG. 43.

For example, as shown in FIG. 44, the second band display effect displays the effect image d20 in a red semi-transparent band area formed horizontally at the top of the screen of the effect image display device 157, and also displays information d21. It may also be an effect of scrolling from the right side of the screen to the left side. In this case, since the effect image d20 does not overlap with the reel window 113, it becomes easy to visually recognize the information d21. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, in the overlapping region R2 between the effect image d10 and the effect image d20, the effect image d10 is displayed in the foreground and the effect image d20 is displayed in the background, so that the information d11 is treated more favorably than the information d12. It's okay. In this case, since the information d11, especially the 71 symbol, becomes more conspicuous, the player's awareness of the 71 symbol can be further raised.

Further, in FIG. 44, the effect image d20 may be displayed below the reel window 113, or the effect image d20 may be displayed in the area where the operation navigation is displayed. In the latter case, when the second band display effect and the operation navigation are executed simultaneously, the image d2 of the push order navigation and the image d3 of the symbol navigation may be displayed in front of the information d21.

For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the effect image d10 is displayed in a band area formed vertically at the left end of the screen of the effect image display device 157, and the effect image d10 is displayed in a band area formed vertically at the right end of the screen of the effect image display device 157. The effect image d20 may be displayed in the band area, and the scroll direction of the first band display effect and the second band display effect may be the same. In this case, both the effect image d10 and the effect image d20 have no overlapping area with the reel window 113, and the effect is such that the information d11 and the information d21 are scrolled from the bottom to the top of the screen. Since both the effect image d10 and the effect image d20 have no overlapping area with the reel window 113, both the information d11 and the information d21 are easily visible. In addition, when performing only one of the first band display effect or the second band display effect, the effect image d10 or the effect image d20 may be displayed on both the left and right sides. When both the first band display effect and the second band display effect are executed, the display is performed as shown in FIG. 45, or the overlapping area R2 is provided and displayed as shown in FIG. 43 or 44. It's okay.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example was shown in which the information d11 and the information d21 are displayed in the blue semi-transparent band area and the red semi-transparent band area, respectively, but the blue and red semi-transparent areas are not necessarily formed. There's no need. That is, only the information d11 and the information d21 may be scroll-displayed without forming a semi-transparent area. In this case as well, since the band is formed by character strings (information strings), it corresponds to the band display effect in this case.

<Count of acquired number display in AT state>
Next, a counting method for displaying the number of acquired coins in the AT state will be explained using FIG. 46. FIG. 46(a) is a diagram illustrating a method of counting the acquired number display d1 in a state other than the ending state of the AT state (hereinafter referred to as a non-ending state), and FIG. It is a figure explaining the counting method of the acquired number display d1A of.

In this embodiment, in the non-ending state, the number of acquired coins counted using the net increase number counter is displayed, while in the ending state, the net increase number counted using the MY counter is displayed. Therefore, when transitioning from the non-ending state to the ending state, the net increase number display using the net increase number counter is switched to the net increase number display using the MY counter. Of course, since the counter to be referred to changes, the value displayed on the acquired number display d1 may also change. The reason why the counters referred to in the non-ending state and the ending state are different is that in the ending state, the player is given a sense of accomplishment of being able to obtain 2400 coins, which is the upper limit of the number of coins to be acquired in the advantageous section. If the number of acquired coins is displayed using the net increase number counter in the ending state, there is a possibility that the ending state will end when the number of acquired coins is less than the upper limit of 2400 coins (for example, if the number of acquired coins is less than the upper limit of 2400 coins) In this case, there is a risk that the impression given to the player will be bad.In order to eliminate such a problem, in this embodiment, in order to eliminate such a problem, the MY We decided to use a counter. Note that in the ending state, the number of acquired coins is displayed using the MY counter, but the update of the net increase number counter continues internally. However, updating of the net increase number counter may be ended internally.

First, a method of counting the acquired number display d1 in a non-ending state will be explained using FIG. 46(a). The acquired number of coins display d1 in the non-ending state is based on the count of the net increase number counter that starts from the time the CZ state is started.

In the N-th game, the slot machine 100 wins the small win 6 (bell), so it pays out 8 medals. As a result, in the acquired number of coins display d1, 70 coins are displayed by adding the 8 paid-out coins.

Next, based on the player's bet operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 for the N+1 game. As a result, in the acquired medal number display d1, 67 medals are displayed after subtracting the 3 inserted medals. Next, the slot machine 100 pays out 8 medals because the small winning combination 6 (bell) was won based on the stop operation by the player in the N+1th game. As a result, the number of acquired coins display d1 displays 75 coins, which is the sum of the eight paid-out coins.

Next, based on the player's bet operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 for the N+2 game. As a result, in the acquired medal number display d1, 72 medals are displayed after subtracting the 3 inserted medals.

In this way, in the non-ending state, the number of acquired medals display d1 is updated each time there is an increase or decrease in medals in one game. Specifically, the acquired number display d1 is added and updated at the timing when the medals are paid out (more precisely, the timing when the third stop reel stops and the winning is determined), and the number display d1 is updated at the timing when the medals are bet (more precisely, at the timing when the third stop reel stops and the winning is determined). is subtracted and updated at the timing of the start operation when the bet is finalized. Note that if the medals are not paid out, the acquired number display d1 is not updated.

Next, a method of counting the acquired number display d1 in the ending state will be explained using FIG. 46(b). The acquired number of coins display d1A in the ending state is based on the count of the MY counter that starts from the start of the advantageous section. It should be noted that when transitioning from the non-ending state to the ending state, the net increase number display using the net increase number counter is switched to the net increase number display using the MY counter.

In the M-th game, the slot machine 100 wins the small winning combination 6 (bell), so it pays out 8 medals. However, the acquired number display d1A in the ending state displays 2105 pieces, which is 2100 pieces plus 5 pieces (the reason will be described later).

Next, based on the player's bet operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 for the M+1 game. In the M+1 game, the acquired number display d1A is not updated based on the bet operation and the start operation, and the acquired number display d1A remains at 2105 coins.

Next, when a small winning combination 6 (bell) is won based on the stop operation of the player in the M+1 game, the slot machine 100 pays out 8 medals. As a result, in the acquired number display d1A, 2110 medals are displayed by subtracting the 3 medals inserted in the M+1 game and adding the 8 medals paid out, that is, adding a total of 5 medals (as described above). The same applies to the M game). Subsequently, based on the player's bet operation and start operation, the slot machine 100 starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 for the M+2 game. In the M+2 game, the acquired number display d1A is not updated based on the bet operation and the start operation, and the acquired number display d1A remains at 2110 coins.

On the other hand, if the M+1 game is a loss based on the player's stop operation, the slot machine 100 does not pay out medals. As a result, in the acquired medal number display d1A, 2102 medals are displayed after subtracting the three medals inserted in the M+2 game.

In this way, in the ending state, the acquired number display d1 is updated once per game. Specifically, the acquired number display d1A indicates the number of medals inserted in the game and the game at the timing when the medals are paid out (more precisely, the timing when the third stop reel stops and the winning is determined). Additions and subtractions are performed taking into account the number of medals paid out in , and the number of medals is updated. Since the ending state is a state where the end of the AT state is approaching, updates should not be performed when medals are inserted to ensure that the subtraction update is performed, and in order to avoid giving the impression that medals are decreasing in the ending state as much as possible. ing.

Also, in the non-ending state, the amount of increase in the game value in the AT state of 1 is displayed, while in the ending state, the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous section of 1 is displayed, so you can earn up to the upper limit of the number of coins that can be obtained in the advantageous section. This can give the player a sense of accomplishment. Although the ending state and the non-ending state of this embodiment are displayed in this manner, the display method is not limited to this, and even in a state in which the player does not want to feel a decrease in the game value, the game can be displayed in this way. A display method may be adopted in which the display of the number of acquired medals is updated once in one game, taking into consideration the number of medals inserted in the game and the number of medals paid out in the game. For example, it can be employed during a bonus (during a pseudo-bonus), during a specialization zone, or in a state where it is certain that the transition to the ending state will occur.

<Operation promotion performance and operation response performance>
Next, the operation promotion effect and operation response effect of this embodiment will be explained using FIGS. 47 and 94. FIGS. 47 and 94 are diagrams showing changes in the performance mode of the performance image display device 157 when performing the operation promotion performance and the operation response performance of this embodiment. Note that FIG. 47 shows the flow of the effect when the PUSH button 192 or the bet button 132 is operated while the operation promotion effect is being executed, and FIG. 94 shows the flow of the effect when the operation promotion effect is being executed. The flow of the performance is also shown in consideration of the case where neither the PUSH button 192 nor the bet button 132 is operated.

The operation promotion effect (also referred to as an operation request in the figure) is a presentation that urges the user to operate the PUSH button 192. Specifically, the operation promotion performance is a performance that displays a performance image d31 that prompts the user to operate the PUSH button 192 after the third stop operation on the performance image display device 157, and lights up the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132. Illumination of the PUSH button 192 indicates that an operation on the PUSH button 192 can be accepted, and illumination of the bet button 132 indicates that an operation on the bet button 132 can be accepted.

The operation response performance is a performance that is executed in response to an operation on the PUSH button 192 or the bet button 132 when the operation is performed in response to the execution of the operation promotion performance. In other words, the operation response performance is a performance that is executed not only when the PUSH button 192 related to performance execution is operated as prompted by the operation promotion performance, but also when the bet button 132 related to game progress is operated.

Specifically, the operation response effects include a first operation response effect executed based on the first operation on the PUSH button 192 and a second operation response effect executed based on the second operation on the PUSH button 192 or the bet button 132. It is equipped with two operation response effects. In this way, in this embodiment, the PUSH button 192 can be operated twice, and the operation promotion effect is the first operation promotion effect (operation request 1 in the figure) that prompts the first operation of the PUSH button 192. ), and a second operation promotion effect (also referred to as operation request 2 in the figure) that prompts a second operation of the PUSH button 192.

Here, the first operation response performance (also referred to as winning/losing announcement in the figure) is a performance that displays a performance image d32 indicating winning or non-winning of the award on the performance image display device 157, and the second operation response The effect (also referred to as type announcement in the figure) is an effect in which a effect image d33 indicating the type of benefit to be granted (contents of the benefit) is displayed on the effect image display device 157. For example, in the case of an AT state, the privilege means any one of AT stock provision, transition to a pseudo BB state, and transition to a specialized state. Note that the type of benefit (content of the benefit) may notify the number of these benefits (stock number).

47 and 94 show a case in which an operation promotion effect and an operation response effect are executed in an effect in which two characters (lord and samurai) confront each other (Figs. 47(a) to (e), Fig. 94 (a) to (e)). The slot machine 100 executes the first operation promotion performance after the third stop operation of a predetermined game (a game in which the execution conditions for the operation promotion performance are satisfied), and displays a performance image d31 that prompts the first operation of the PUSH button 192. (For example, an image of the PUSH button 192) is displayed, and both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit (FIG. 47(b), FIG. 94(b)). By displaying the effect image d31, the player can understand that the PUSH button 192 can be operated. Further, although there is no display prompting the user to operate the bet button 132, since the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit, it can be understood that both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 can be operated.

When the player performs the first operation on the PUSH button 192 in response to the first operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the first operation response effect and displays the effect image d32 ( 47(b), (c), FIG. 94(b), (c)). The performance image d32 is an image indicating winning or non-winning of a benefit, and specifically, an image related to victory or defeat in a confrontation between two characters (lord, samurai) (for example, an image with words such as victory or defeat). It is. Victory means winning the award, and defeat means not winning the award. FIG. 47 and FIG. 94 show that the owner won and was awarded a benefit. In addition, when the winning of a bonus award is announced in the first operation response performance, the movable accessory 193 appears in front of the performance image display device 157, and retreats after a predetermined period of time (Fig. 47(c), FIG. 94(c)).

Here, in response to the first operation promotion performance, if the player does not operate the PUSH button 192 for the first time, or in response to the first operation promotion performance, the player does not operate the bet button 132. If not performed, the first operation promotion effect is repeatedly executed and the effect image d31 is continuously displayed (FIG. 94(b)). In this manner, in this embodiment, when the PUSH button 192 is operated for the first time while the first operation promotion effect is being executed, the first operation response effect is executed and the effect image d32 is displayed. It has become.

Next, the slot machine 100 that has executed the first operation response effect indicating winning of the bonus award executes the second operation promotion effect, and displays the effect image d31 (for example, PUSH button 192), and both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit (FIG. 47(d), FIG. 94(d)). Here, the second operation promotion performance is a performance that displays the performance image d31 while taking over the performance image d32 of the first operation response performance. That is, the second operation promotion performance is configured to be executed when the first operation response performance is executed. Furthermore, since the first operation response performance is configured to be executed when the PUSH button 192 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion performance, the second operation promotion performance is It can also be said that this is a performance that is executed when the PUSH button 192 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion performance. By displaying the effect image d31, the player can understand that the PUSH button 192 can be operated. Further, although there is no display prompting the user to operate the bet button 132, since the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit, it can be understood that both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 can be operated. Note that when the first operation response effect indicating non-winning of the bonus is executed, the slot machine 100 does not execute the second operation promotion effect (not shown in FIGS. 47 and 94).

When the player operates the PUSH button 192 for the second time in response to the second operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 ( FIG. 47(e), FIG. 94(e)). The effect image d33 is an image showing the type of benefit to be granted (contents of the benefit), and specifically, as shown in FIGS. 47(e) and 94(e), This is an image showing a number. The effect image d33 in FIGS. 47(e) and 94(e) indicates that the AT1 set is provided. Note that when the first operation response performance indicating non-winning of the award grant is executed, the slot machine 100 does not execute the second operation promotion performance, so the second operation response performance may be executed. (not shown in FIGS. 47 and 94).

In addition, if the second operation response performance is executed before the movable accessory 193 retreats, part or all of the performance image d33 may become difficult to see due to the presence of the movable accessory 193. However, since the movable accessory 193 retreats after the predetermined time has elapsed, the performance image d33 becomes visible thereafter.

On the other hand, if the player performs an operation on the bet button 132 in response to the first operation promotion performance, the slot machine 100 executes a second operation response performance (if a benefit is awarded), The effect image d33 is displayed (FIGS. 47(b), (e), FIGS. 94(b), (e)). In other words, if the BET button 132 is operated instead of the PUSH button 192, which is prompted to operate, the performance image d32 indicating winning or non-winning of the award is skipped, and the type of award to be awarded (the content of the award) is suddenly displayed. ) is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to grasp the award type (benefits content) without operating the PUSH button 192.

Furthermore, even when the player performs an operation on the bet button 132 in response to the second operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 (see FIG. 47(d), (e), FIG. 94(d), (e)).

Here, if the player does not operate the PUSH button 192 for the second time in response to the second operation promotion effect, or if the player does not operate the bet button 132 in response to the second operation promotion effect. If not performed, the second operation promotion effect is repeatedly executed, and the effect image d31 is continuously displayed (FIG. 94(d)). In this manner, in this embodiment, when the PUSH button 192 is operated for the second time or the bet button 132 is operated while the second operation promotion effect is being executed, the second operation response effect is executed, and the effect is Image d33 is now displayed.

Next, after the second operation response performance is executed and the performance image d33 is displayed, the player performs a start operation (more specifically, if a bet operation has already been performed, an operation on the start lever 135, a bet operation If a bet operation and a start lever operation are performed if the above is not performed, the slot machine 100 executes the performance of the next game (FIGS. 47(e), (f), FIGS. 94(e), (f)). )). Note that the star mark image d5 shown in FIGS. 47(f) and 94(e) indicates the stock in the AT state, and the number of star marks indicates the stock number. In addition, although FIGS. 47(e) and (f) and FIGS. 94(e) and (f) show cases where the start operation is performed after the second operation response effect is executed, the start lever 135 When a start operation is performed for , all performances in progress are canceled and the performance for the next game is executed. For example, if the player performs a start operation while the first operation promotion performance or the second operation promotion performance is being executed, all the performances in progress are canceled and the performance of the next game is executed. However, if the player performs a start operation while executing the first operation promotion performance or the second operation promotion performance, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response performance (when a benefit is granted). ), the performance of the next game may be executed. Also,
In addition to the second operation response performance, the next game performance may be performed after performing a predetermined performance that can specify that a privilege will be awarded.

In addition, in this embodiment, (1) the bet button 132 is not lit if the operation promotion performance is not executed in the game in which the re-gaming role is won and the re-gaming role is won, but (2) the re-gaming role is won However, when executing the operation promotion effect in the game in which the player wins the re-game winning combination, the bet button 132 is lit while the operation promotion effect is executed (the PUSH button 192 is also lit). ). As a result, when executing the operation promotion effect, the player can understand that the bet button 132 can be operated even in a game in which the replay winning combination has been won. It is possible to prompt the user to operate the bet button 132 instead of forcing the player to do so.

In addition, if the power is cut off and restored after the first operation promotion performance, the first operation promotion performance may not be executed again, or the first operation response performance or the second operation response performance may not be executed. On the other hand, there are cases where the first operation promotion performance is executed again, or the first operation response performance or the second operation response performance is executed. In addition, if the power is cut off and restored after the second operation promotion effect, the second operation promotion effect may not be executed again or the second operation response effect may not be executed. The second operation promotion effect may be executed again, or the second operation response effect may be executed. Further, even if the power is cut off or restored when the operating means is operated, the effect may not be executed, but the effect may be executed, similarly to the above.

Next, the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect will be specifically explained for each operation pattern using FIGS. 95 to 98. 95 to 98 show, for each operation pattern for the PUSH button 192 or the bet button 132, the execution timing of the operation promotion effect and the operation response effect, the timing at which the operation acceptance of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 becomes valid, and the PUSH button 192 is a time chart showing the lighting timing of the bet button 132 and the bet button 132. It should be noted that FIGS. 95 to 98 are all time charts when a benefit is given.

FIG. 95(a) shows a case where the player performs an operation response effect by operating the PUSH button 192 twice after the third stop operation.

In this case, the slot machine 100 issues the first operation promotion performance (operation request 1 in the figure) based on the time t1 of the third stop operation of the predetermined game (the game in which the execution conditions for the operation promotion performance are satisfied). At the same time, the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit. In this embodiment, the first operation promotion effect is executed from time t1, but the first operation promotion effect may be executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from time t1. Also,
The first operation promotion effect may be executed from a time before time t1, for example, the first operation promotion effect may be executed after the start operation of the game is performed.

Next, when the PUSH button 192 is operated while the first operation promotion effect is being executed, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t2 of the PUSH button 192 operation (more specifically, when the detection signal of the PUSH button 192 operation is turned off. The first operation response effect (notification of winning or losing in the figure) is executed based on the timing when the button is turned on, invalidating the reception of the operation of the PUSH button 192, and turning off the PUSH button 192. Note that even after time t2, the operation acceptance of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed from time t2 to time t3, the slot machine 100 ends the first operation response performance based on time t3, and starts the second operation promotion performance (operation request 2 in the figure). ), the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned on.

Next, when the PUSH button 192 is operated while the second operation promotion effect is being executed, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t4 of the PUSH button 192 operation (more specifically, when the detection signal of the PUSH button 192 operation is turned OFF). The second operation response effect (type notification in the figure) is executed based on the time point when the PUSH button 192 is turned on, and the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 is disabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned off. Note that even after time t4, the operation acceptance of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit.

FIG. 95(b) shows a case where the player has pressed the PUSH button 192 before the third stop operation and executes the operation response effect by operating the PUSH button 192 twice after the third stop operation. ing.

In this case, the PUSH button 192 has been operated since the time t10 before the third stop operation of the predetermined game (the game in which the execution conditions for the operation promotion effect have been met) (the PUSH button 192 continues to be pressed). ). At time t10, the slot machine 100 disables operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132, and turns off the lights of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132.

When the third stop operation is performed while the PUSH button 192 continues to be pressed, the slot machine 100 performs the first operation promotion effect (operation request in the figure) based on time t11 of the third stop operation. 1) is executed, the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are turned on. In this way, the present embodiment is configured such that even if the third stop operation is performed while the PUSH button 192 continues to be pressed, the first operation promotion effect is executed after the third stop operation. has been done. In this embodiment, by employing such a configuration, even if the PUSH button 192 is unexpectedly operated before an operation request for the PUSH button 192 is made, the PUSH button 192 lights up, so that the PUSH button 192 cannot be operated. The player can understand that it is valid. Further, since the first operation promotion effect is not canceled, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that since the operation on the PUSH button 192 was performed before the operation on the PUSH button 192 became effective, the slot machine 100 performs the first operation response performance (win/loss notification in the figure) based on time t11. Never run.

Next, when an operation is performed on the PUSH button 192 during execution of the first operation promotion effect (specifically, an operation in which the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 changes from ON to OFF to ON), the slot machine 100 performs the PUSH Based on the time point t13 of the operation on the button 192 (specifically, the time point when the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 changes from OFF to ON), the first operation response performance (win/loss notification in the figure) is executed, and the PUSH button 192 is disabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned off. Note that even after time t13, the operation acceptance of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit. Furthermore, the PUSH button 192 continues to be pressed after time t13.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from time t13 to time t14, the slot machine 100 ends the first operation response performance based on time t14, and starts the second operation promotion performance (operation request 2 in the figure). ), the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned on. In this manner, the present embodiment is configured such that the second operation promotion effect is executed even if the PUSH button 192 continues to be pressed. In this embodiment, by employing such a configuration, even if the PUSH button 192 is unexpectedly operated before an operation request for the PUSH button 192 is made, the PUSH button 192 lights up, so that the PUSH button 192 cannot be operated. The player can understand that it is valid. Furthermore, since the second operation promotion effect is not canceled, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Next, when an operation is performed on the PUSH button 192 during execution of the second operation promotion effect (specifically, an operation in which the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 changes from ON→OFF→ON), the slot machine 100 performs the PUSH button 192. Based on the time point t16 of the operation on the button 192 (specifically, the time point when the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 changes from OFF to ON), a second operation response effect (type notification in the figure) is executed, and the PUSH button 192 is disabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned off. Note that even after time t4, the operation acceptance of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit.

In this embodiment, when the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect is executed while the PUSH button 192 is continuously pressed, the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 changes from ON→OFF→ Based on the operation that turns ON, the corresponding operation response performance (first operation response performance, second operation response performance) is executed at the timing when the detection signal changes from OFF to ON, but when the detection signal turns ON →An operation response performance may be executed at the timing when the switch is turned OFF. In addition, if the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect is executed while the PUSH button 192 is continuously pressed, the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect is executed for a predetermined period of time. After that, corresponding operation response effects (first operation response effect, second operation response effect) may be executed.

FIG. 96 shows a case where the player first operates the PUSH button 192 after the third stop operation, and then operates the bet button 132 to execute an operation response effect.

In this case, the slot machine 100 issues the first operation promotion performance (operation request 1 in the figure) based on the time point t21 of the third stop operation of the predetermined game (the game in which the execution conditions for the operation promotion performance are satisfied). At the same time, the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit.

Next, when the PUSH button 192 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t22 of the PUSH button 192 operation (more specifically, when the detection signal of the PUSH button 192 operation is turned OFF to The first operation response effect (notification of winning or losing in the figure) is executed based on the timing when the button is turned on, invalidating the reception of the operation of the PUSH button 192, and turning off the PUSH button 192. Note that even after time t22, the operation acceptance of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed from time t22 to time t23, the slot machine 100 ends the first operation response performance based on time t23, and starts the second operation promotion performance (operation request 2 in the figure). ), the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned on.

Next, when the bet button 132 is operated during execution of the second operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t24 of the operation on the bet button 132 (more specifically, when the detection signal of the operation on the bet button 132 is turned OFF to The second operation response performance (type notification in the figure) is executed based on the time when the button turns ON, invalidates the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132, and turns off the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132. let

FIG. 97 shows a case where the player executes an operation response effect by operating the bet button 132 after the third stop operation.

In this case, the slot machine 100 issues the first operation promotion performance (operation request 1 in the figure) based on the time t31 of the third stop operation of a predetermined game (a game in which the execution conditions for the operation promotion performance are satisfied). At the same time, the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit.

Next, when the bet button 132 is operated during the execution of the first operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t32 of the operation on the bet button 132 (more specifically, when the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 is turned OFF to The second operation response performance (type notification in the figure) is executed based on the time when the button turns ON, invalidates the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132, and turns off the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132. let

FIG. 98 shows a case where the player has pressed the bet button 132 before the third stop operation and executes the operation response effect by operating the PUSH button 192 twice after the third stop operation.

In this case, the bet button 132 has been operated since the time t40 before the third stop operation of the predetermined game (the game in which the execution conditions for the operation promotion effect have been met) (the bet button 132 continues to be pressed). ). At time t40, the slot machine 100 disables operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132, and turns off the lights of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132.

When the third stop operation is performed while the bet button 132 continues to be pressed, the slot machine 100 performs the first operation promotion effect (operation request in the figure) based on time t41 of the third stop operation. 1) is executed, the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are turned on. In this way, the present embodiment is configured such that even if the third stop operation is performed while the bet button 132 continues to be pressed, the first operation promotion effect is executed after the third stop operation. has been done. In this embodiment, by adopting such a configuration, even if the bet button 132 is accidentally operated before the operation request for the bet button 132 is made, the PUSH button 192 lights up, so the operation on the PUSH button 192 is not performed. The player can understand that it is valid. Further, since the first operation promotion effect is not canceled, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that since the operation on the bet button 132 was performed before the operation on the bet button 132 became valid, the slot machine 100 issues the second operation response performance (type notification in the figure) based on time t41. Never run.

Next, when the PUSH button 192 is operated while the first operation promotion effect is being executed, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t42 of the PUSH button 192 operation (more specifically, when the detection signal of the PUSH button 192 operation is turned OFF to The first operation response effect (notification of winning or losing in the figure) is executed based on the timing when the button is turned on, invalidating the reception of the operation of the PUSH button 192, and turning off the PUSH button 192. Note that even after time t42, the operation reception of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit.

Next, when a predetermined period of time has passed from time t42 to time t43, the slot machine 100 ends the first operation response performance based on time t43, and starts the second operation promotion performance (operation request 2 in the figure). ), the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 is enabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned on. In this manner, the present embodiment is configured such that the second operation promotion effect is executed even if the bet button 132 continues to be pressed. In this embodiment, by employing such a configuration, even if the PUSH button 192 is unexpectedly operated before the operation request for the bet button 132 is made, the PUSH button 192 lights up, so that the PUSH button 192 is not operated. The player can understand that it is valid. Furthermore, since the second operation promotion effect is not canceled, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Next, when the PUSH button 192 is operated while the second operation promotion effect is being executed, the slot machine 100 detects the operation at the time t44 of the operation on the PUSH button 192 (more specifically, when the detection signal of the operation on the PUSH button 192 is from OFF to The second operation response effect (type notification in the figure) is executed based on the time point when the PUSH button 192 is turned on, and the operation reception of the PUSH button 192 is disabled, and the PUSH button 192 is turned off. Note that even after time t44, the operation acceptance of the bet button 132 is valid, and the bet button 132 continues to be lit.

In addition, in FIG. 98, a case has been described in which the player has pressed the bet button 132 before the third stop operation, and executes the operation response effect by operating the PUSH button 192 twice after the third stop operation. . However, apart from this, the player has pressed the bet button 132 before the third stop operation, and after the third stop operation, the player operates the bet button 132 (in detail, the detection signal of the operation on the bet button 132 is ON → When an operation that changes from OFF to ON) is performed, the slot machine 100 performs the operation at the time t41 of the operation on the bet button 132 (more specifically, at the time t41 of the operation on the bet button 132 (more specifically, at the operation where the detection signal of the operation on the bet button 132 changes from ON to OFF to ON). , when the detection signal of the operation on the bet button 132 changes from OFF to ON), the second operation response effect (type notification in the figure) is executed. In this case, the slot machine 100 disables operation reception of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 after time t41, and turns off the lights of the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132.

FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a modified example of the operation promotion performance and the operation response performance. In modification A shown in FIG. 99, the notification content of the operation response performance is different from the notification content of the operation response performance described above. In modification A, in detail, the type of privilege to be awarded in the first operation response performance is notified, and the number of benefits to be awarded in the second operation response performance is notified. Note that FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the transition of the performance mode of the performance image display device 157 when executing the operation promotion performance and the operation response performance of modification A.

In modification A, the slot machine 100 is configured to notify the type of benefits to be awarded in the first operation response performance and to notify the number of benefits to be awarded in the second operation response performance. , when executing the first operation request performance (also referred to as operation request 1 in the figure), as a premise, a performance image d30 in which a plurality of benefits are spinning on a roulette (for example, an image d30A showing the letter V, In a state in which the image d30B showing the characters specialization and the image d30C showing the characters EXTRA are being displayed, the effect image d31 (for example, the image of the PUSH button 192) that prompts the first operation of the PUSH button 192 is displayed. At the same time, both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit (FIGS. 99(a) and 99(b)). In modification A shown in FIG. 99, specifically, the benefits granted are (1) AT stock, (2) specialized zone, (3) advantageous states such as upper AT, ending state, and bonus. Therefore, the effect image d30 is an effect image in which each of the image d30A showing the AT stock, the image d30B showing the specialized zone, and the image d30C showing the upper advantageous state rotates in a circular shape.

When the player performs the first operation on the PUSH button 192 in response to the first operation promotion performance, the slot machine 100 executes the first operation response performance (also referred to as type notification in the figure). Then, the effect image d32 is displayed (FIGS. 99(b) and 99(c)). Here, the effect image d32 is an image of a privilege selected from among the plurality of privileges shown in the effect image d30. In FIG. 99(c), an effect image d32 indicating that AT stock has been provided is displayed.

Here, in response to the first operation promotion performance, if the player does not operate the PUSH button 192 for the first time, or in response to the first operation promotion performance, the player does not operate the bet button 132. If not performed, the first operation promotion effect is repeatedly executed and the effect image d31 is continuously displayed (FIG. 99(b)). In this way, in modification A, when the PUSH button 192 is operated for the first time while the first operation promotion effect is being executed, the first operation response effect is executed and the effect image d32 is displayed. It has become.

Next, the slot machine 100 that has executed the first operation response effect indicating the type of the granted benefit executes the second operation promotion effect (also referred to as operation request 2 in the figure), and presses the PUSH button 192 for the second time. An effect image d31 (for example, an image of the PUSH button 192) prompting an operation is displayed, and both the PUSH button 192 and the bet button 132 are lit (FIG. 99(d)). Here, the second operation promotion performance is a performance that displays the performance image d31 while taking over the performance image d32 of the first operation response performance. That is, the second operation promotion performance is configured to be executed when the first operation response performance is executed. Furthermore, since the first operation response performance is configured to be executed when the PUSH button 192 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion performance, the second operation promotion performance is It can also be said that this is a performance that is executed when the PUSH button 192 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion performance.

When the player operates the PUSH button 192 for the second time in response to the second operation promotion performance, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response performance (also referred to as number announcement in the figure). Then, the effect image d33 is displayed (FIG. 99(e)). The effect image d33 is an image showing the number of benefits to be given, and specifically, as shown in FIG. 99(e), it is an image showing the number of AT states to be given. The effect image d33 in FIG. 99(e) shows that the AT5 set is provided.

On the other hand, when the player performs an operation on the bet button 132 in response to the first operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 (Fig. 99(b), (e)). In other words, if the bet button 132 is operated instead of the PUSH button 192 which is prompted to operate, the effect image d32 showing the type of benefits to be awarded is skipped and the effect suddenly shows the number of benefits to be awarded. An image d33 is displayed (an effect image d32 indicating the type of benefit to be provided is also displayed). Furthermore, even when the player performs an operation on the bet button 132 in response to the second operation promotion effect, the slot machine 100 executes the second operation response effect and displays the effect image d33 (see FIG. 99(d), (e)).

Here, if the player does not operate the PUSH button 192 for the second time in response to the second operation promotion effect, or if the player does not operate the bet button 132 in response to the second operation promotion effect. If not performed, the second operation promotion effect is repeatedly executed and the effect image d31 is continuously displayed (FIG. 99(d)). In this way, in modification A, when the PUSH button 192 is operated for the second time or the bet button 132 is operated while the second operation promotion effect is being executed, the second operation response effect is executed, and the effect is activated. Image d33 is now displayed.

Next, after the second operation response performance is executed and the performance image d33 is displayed, the player performs a start operation (more specifically, if a bet operation has already been performed, an operation on the start lever 135, a bet operation If the player performs a bet operation and a start lever operation when the player has not performed a bet operation and a start lever operation), the slot machine 100 executes the performance of the next game (FIGS. 99(e) and 99(f)). Note that the star mark image d5 shown in FIG. 99(f) indicates the stock in the AT state, and the number of star marks indicates the stock number. Further, although FIGS. 99(e) and (f) show the case where the start operation is performed after the second operation response effect is executed, when the start operation is performed on the start lever 135, All performances that are currently being executed are canceled and the production for the next game is executed. For example, if the player performs a start operation while the first operation promotion performance or the second operation promotion performance is being executed, all the performances in progress are canceled and the performance of the next game is executed. However, if the player performs a start operation while executing the first operation promotion performance or the second operation promotion performance, the slot machine 100 performs the next game performance after executing the second operation response performance. may also be executed. Also,
In addition to the second operation response performance, the next game performance may be performed after performing a predetermined performance that can specify that a privilege will be awarded.

FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating an outline of a modification of the operation promotion performance and the operation response performance. In both the first modification example shown in FIG. 48(a) and the second modification example shown in FIG. 48(b), an operation promotion effect (also referred to as an operation request in the figure) that prompts an operation on the PUSH button 192 is executed up to three times. It is possible to do so. In other words, the operation promotion effects of Modifications 1 and 2 are a first operation promotion effect (also referred to as operation request 1 in the figure) that prompts the first operation of the PUSH button 192, and a first operation response effect during execution. A second operation promotion effect (also referred to as operation request 2 in the figure) that prompts a second operation of the PUSH button 192 during execution, and a second operation promotion effect that urges a third operation of the PUSH button 192 during execution of the second operation response effect. The third operation promotion effect (also referred to as operation request 3 in the figure) is provided. Here, the first operation response performance is a performance in response to the first operation promotion performance, and the second operation response performance is a performance that is executed when the player operates the PUSH button 192. The third operation response performance is a performance in response to the third operation promotion performance, and is performed when the player operates the PUSH button 192. This is an effect that is executed when the PUSH button 192 is operated. In addition, in Modifications 1 and 2, if the bet button 132 is operated during execution of the first operation promotion performance, the second operation promotion performance, or the third operation promotion performance, the third operation promotion performance is The operation response effect is executed.

In addition, in Modifications 1 and 2, the performance image that prompts the operation of the PUSH button 192 of the operation promotion performance (first operation promotion performance, second operation promotion performance, third operation promotion performance) is d31, the first operation promotion performance The effect image of the operation response effect is expressed as d32, the effect image of the second operation response effect is expressed as d33, and the effect image of the third operation response effect is expressed as d34. The effect image d34 is an image showing the final response of the operation response effect.

For example, in the case of modification 1, the image of the operation response effect is an image of an icon, and as shown in FIG. 48(a1), the effect image d32 is an image of one icon, the effect image d33 is an image of two icons, The effect image d34 is an image of three icons. That is, when the PUSH button 192 is operated each time for the operation promotion effect, the number of icons increases one by one, and finally, the effect image d34 with three icons is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(a2), when the bet button 132 is operated for the second operation promotion effect, a effect image d34 of three icons is displayed. When the bet button 132 is operated in this way, the effect image d34 indicating the final response may be suddenly displayed.

For example, in the case of modification 2, the image of the operation response effect is an image showing the number of additional games, and as shown in FIG. 48(b1), the effect image d32 is an image showing +10G, the effect image d33 is an image showing +20G, and effect image d34 is an image showing a total of +30G. In other words, if the PUSH button 192 is operated each time for the operation promotion effect, the number of additional games awarded for each operation will be displayed for the first and second operations, and the number of additional games awarded for each operation will be displayed for the first and second operations. For the operation, the total number of additional games awarded for the first and second operations is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(b2), when the bet button 132 is operated for the second operation promotion effect, the effect image d34, that is, the total number of additional games is suddenly displayed. When the bet button 132 is operated in this manner, the contents of the effect image d34 indicating the total value may be suddenly displayed.

<Other game machines>
Note that the slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to the medals, and the gaming medium is The input is made from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device with a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals or a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning). , includes inputting electronic data, and paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

<Summary of embodiments>
(1) Some gaming machines display the net increase in the number of medals acquired during advantageous gaming conditions such as during replay time or during AT (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-6223). Furthermore, among gaming machines with AT, there are machines that allow additions and stocks during the AT period, and when additions are determined, there are also machines that notify the number of additions and the number of stocks.

However, if the number of coins earned or the number of additional bonuses is small and the number is not satisfactory to the player, displaying the small number of net additional coins or the number of additional bonuses will give a bad impression to the player, and this can be improved. That was what was required.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that does not give a bad impression to the player when displaying a predetermined event in an advantageous gaming state.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
an updating unit (e.g., net increase number counter, main control unit 300) that executes an update process regarding a predetermined event (e.g., net increase number of sheets, etc.);
Display means (for example, effect image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) for displaying the predetermined event;
A gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the gaming state,
A game machine comprising:
The gaming state includes a specific gaming state (for example, CZ state, AT state),
The AT gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, CZ state) and a second specific gaming state (for example, AT state),
The display means is a means for not displaying the predetermined event in the first specific gaming state, but displaying the predetermined event in the second specific gaming state (for example, FIG. 38),
The updating means is means for executing the updating process in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state,
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, since no display regarding the predetermined event is made in the first specific gaming state, the player's interest can be focused not on the predetermined event but on the game in the first specific gaming state. Furthermore, since the update process regarding the predetermined event is performed in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the player will not feel a sense of loss regarding the predetermined event in the first specific gaming state. .

In the first basic configuration,
When displaying the predetermined event in the second specific gaming state, the display means displays a display that reflects the update processing of the first specific gaming state.
This is a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, in the second specific gaming state, a display regarding a predetermined event that reflects the update processing of the first specific gaming state is performed, so that it is possible to give surprise to the player.

In the first basic configuration or preferred configuration A1,
The second specific gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first specific gaming state.
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration A1α.

In the first basic configuration, preferred configuration A1, or preferred configuration A1α,
The gaming state control means causes a transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state when a specific event is established in the first specific gaming state (for example, when winning an AT lottery). , if the specific event is not established in the first specific gaming state (for example, if the AT lottery is not won), the first specific gaming state changes to the second specific gaming state. This is a means of preventing migration.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A2.

According to the preferred configuration A2, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first specific game state.

In preferred configuration A2,
The first specific gaming state is a chance zone (for example, CZ state) in which the right to transition to the second specific gaming state can be acquired.
This is a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, it is possible to improve the game interest in the first specific game state. In addition, by not displaying a predetermined event in the first specific gaming state, even if the transition to the second specific gaming state does not occur, the player will not be left with a negative impression and the player will not be dissatisfied. can be prevented from occurring.

In the first basic configuration, preferred configuration A1, preferred configuration A1α, preferred configuration A2, or preferred configuration A3,
The first specific gaming state is a gaming state that continues for a predetermined period,
This is assumed to be a preferred configuration A4.

According to the preferred configuration A4, since the first specific gaming state is a state that continues for a predetermined period of time, a certain amount of profit can be given to the player.

(2) As for game machines, there are known game machines that have a combination of navigations that require eye presses and navigations that do not require eye presses (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-89468).

However, as shown in the above-mentioned literature, in a gaming machine where there is a mixture of navigations that require eye presses and navigations that do not require eye presses, if a navigation that does not require eye presses occurs when operating the start lever, the enjoyment of eye presses will be reduced. There is a problem in that people lose their sense of expectation and lose interest in the game.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of these circumstances, and provides a game machine that can create a sense of anticipation for the eye-catching navigation.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A game machine capable of playing games,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and stop the rotation of the reels individually,
When a predetermined effect indicating operating conditions for the stop button is being executed, a specific effect that increases the operating conditions can be executed;
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, when a predetermined effect indicating the operation condition of the stop button is being executed, a specific effect that increases the operation condition is executed, so that it is possible to give surprise to the player.

In the second basic configuration,
Equipped with a notification means (for example, effect image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing operation mode notification (for example, operation navigation) indicating an operation mode according to the winning combination,
The predetermined performance is the operation mode notification,
The operation mode notification includes a first operation mode notification (for example, push order navigation) that notifies the first operation mode (for example, order of stop operation) that does not include the press timing, and a first operation mode notification that includes the press timing. a second operation mode notification (for example, symbol navigation) that notifies the second operation mode (for example, a symbol as a stop target);
The notification means is a means that can change the first operation mode to the second operation mode and execute the second operation mode notification when the first operation mode notification is executed. (For example, FIGS. 39 to 42),
The specific performance is a performance that changes the first operation mode to the second operation mode when the first operation mode notification is executed.
This is designated as a preferred configuration B0.

According to the preferred configuration B0, it is possible to give surprise to the player by changing the navigation that does not involve pressing the eyes to the navigation that involves pressing the eyes.

In a preferred configuration B0,
The notification means executes the first operation mode notification on a predetermined reel (for example, a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel) among the plurality of reels, and when a predetermined trigger ( For example, means for changing the first operation mode notification for the predetermined reel to the second operation mode notification in response to a freeze occurring based on a start lever operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation). be,
This is a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, when the interval until the stop operation is short, it is possible to provide time for pressing the button, and by changing the mode of the navigation, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations.

In preferred configuration B0 or preferred configuration B1,
When a specific symbol (for example, 71 symbol) is displayed in a stopped state, it is more advantageous for the player than when the specific symbol is not displayed in a stopped state (for example, the number of AT stock, transition to pseudo BB, special (e.g. transition to a state of deterioration),
The second operation mode notification is a notification indicating the specific symbol,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B2.

Note that "a specific symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and "a specific symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a specific symbol combination.

According to preferred configuration B2, when a specific symbol stops, there is a high possibility that it will be advantageous to the player, so it is possible to increase interest in being notified of the second operation mode. .

In preferred configuration B2,
The second operation mode notification includes a second operation mode notification A (for example, blue 7 symbol navigation) and a second operation mode notification B (for example, fake navigation),
The second operation mode notification A is a rate at which the specific symbol is stopped and displayed, which is higher than a rate at which the specific symbol is not displayed, when a stop operation is performed at a timing when the specific symbol can be stopped. is a higher operation mode notification,
The second operation mode notification B is such that when a stop operation is performed at a timing when the specific symbol can be stopped, the rate at which the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is higher than that of the second operation mode information A. Low operation mode notification,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B3.

According to the preferred configuration B3, when the second operation mode notification is performed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In preferred configuration B0, preferred configuration B1, preferred configuration B2, or preferred configuration B3,
Comprising internal winning determination means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) that determines internal winning combinations based on lottery information,
The state in which the notification means executes the second operation mode notification includes:
a low probability state (for example, blue 7 symbol navigation low probability state) in which the ratio of executing the second operation mode notification when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination is a first ratio;
A high probability state (for example, a high probability state where the ratio of executing the second operation mode notification when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination is a second ratio higher than the first ratio) (for example, a blue 7 symbol navigation high probability state) and
Equipped with
This is a preferred configuration B4.

According to the preferred configuration B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be controlled to a high probability state.

In preferred configuration B4,
The notification means is a means capable of executing a high probability state effect (for example, a first band display effect) indicating that the high probability state is present.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B5.

According to the preferred configuration B5, by executing the high probability state production, it is possible to easily understand that the state is a high probability state.

In preferred configuration B4 or preferred configuration B5,
The notification means is a means capable of performing a suggestive effect (for example, an inciting effect) suggesting that the high probability state will be entered.
This is a preferred configuration B6.

According to the preferred configuration B6, by executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be controlled to a high probability state.

(3) Among gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays a scrolling display indicating a predetermined state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-135165).

However, in gaming machines that perform scrolling display, there is a problem in that when a plurality of pieces of information are scrolled, sufficient consideration is not given to the display of each piece of information.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of these circumstances, and provides a gaming machine in which consideration is given to the display of each piece of information when scrolling a plurality of pieces of information.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A game machine equipped with presentation means (for example, presentation image display device 157, first control section 400, second control section 500, etc.),
The effect means is a means capable of performing a band display effect (for example, a band display effect) that scrolls a band-shaped display displayed in a predetermined display area (hereinafter referred to as a effect display area),
The band display effect includes a first band display effect (for example, a first band display effect) and a second band display effect (for example, a second band display effect),
The first band display performance is a performance in which first information (for example, information indicating that the seven 1 symbol and the blue 7 symbol navigation are in a high probability state) is displayed,
The second band display performance is a performance in which second information different from the first information (for example, information indicating that the pseudo bonus symbol navigation is in a high probability state) is displayed,
The effect means scrolls the first band display effect in a first direction (for example, upward), and scrolls the second band display effect in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, It is a means of scrolling diagonally downward to the left.
This is the third basic configuration.

According to the third basic configuration, information can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner by making the scrolling directions of two band display performances with different display contents different from each other.

In the third basic configuration,
The display color of the first band display effect is a different color from the display color of the second band display effect,
This is a preferred configuration C1.

According to the preferred configuration C1, information can be communicated more clearly by making the colors of the two band display effects with different display contents different from each other. In the third basic configuration or preferred configuration C1,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate,
stop control means (for example, main control unit 300, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control of the plurality of reels;
A gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the gaming state,
Equipped with
When a specific symbol (for example, 71 symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the specific symbol is not stopped and displayed (for example, the number of AT stock, transition to pseudo BB, special (e.g. transition to a state of deterioration),
The gaming state includes a special state advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo BB state),
The first information is information regarding the specific symbol,
The second information is information regarding the special state,
This is a preferred configuration C2.

Note that "a specific symbol" includes one symbol or a plurality of symbols, and "a specific symbol is stopped and displayed" includes a specific symbol combination.

According to the preferred configuration C2, information regarding specific symbols and information regarding special gaming conditions can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In a preferred configuration C2,
The effect display area has an area that overlaps with an area where the plurality of reels are displayed (hereinafter referred to as the reel display area),
The effect means displays the first band display effect in an area where the effect display area and the reel display area do not overlap (for example, FIGS. 43 to 45);
This is a preferred configuration C3.

According to the preferred configuration C3, since the first band display effect that displays information regarding a specific symbol is scroll-displayed in an area that does not overlap with the reel display area, the first band display effect that displays information regarding a specific symbol is scroll-displayed in an area that does not overlap with the reel display area. It is possible to perform eye-pressing for

In a preferred configuration C3,
The second band display performance is a performance in which a plurality of character strings indicating the second information (for example, bonus high probability medium) are arranged at predetermined intervals (for example, interval S2),
The effect means applies the second band display effect to both a first area that does not overlap with the reel display area and a second area (for example, area R1) that overlaps with the reel display area. This is a means of scrolling the
The effect means is a means for displaying all of one of the character strings in the first area at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of execution of the second band display effect) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 43). 45),
This is a preferred configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, even if the second band display effect overlaps with the reel display area, the timing is provided to make the character information for one phrase completely visible, so the information of the second band display effect is provided. can be clearly shown.

In the third basic configuration, preferred configuration C1, preferred configuration C2, preferred configuration C3, or preferred configuration C4,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a suggestive performance (for example, an inciting performance) that suggests that the band display performance will be performed;
This is a preferred configuration C5.

According to the preferred configuration C5, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the band display effect to be executed.

In the third basic configuration, preferred configuration C1, preferred configuration C2, preferred configuration C3, preferred configuration C4, or preferred configuration C5,
The effect means is a means capable of simultaneously executing the first band display effect and the second band display effect,
When the first band display effect and the second band display effect are simultaneously executed, the effect means is configured to change the display area of the first band display effect to at least the display area of the second band display effect. means for displaying the second band display effect in front of the first band display effect in the overlapped area (for example, FIG. 43);
This is a preferred configuration C6.

According to preferred configuration C6, the second band display effect that overlaps with the reel display area has poorer visibility than the first band display area, so it is displayed in front of the first band display area. This can make it a little easier to see.

(4) Among gaming machines, there are gaming machines that display the net increase in number of coins in gaming conditions that are advantageous to the player, such as during AT or during bonus play (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-208626).

However, if a gaming machine that displays the net increase in medals described above is configured to subtract and display the net increase in medals each time the number of bets is set, there is a risk that the player may be given the impression that the number of medals is decreasing. There is.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of these circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not give the impression that the number of medals is decreasing as much as possible.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
Acquisition number display means (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control 400, a second sub-control unit 500, a medal insertion/start operation reception process, a medal payout process),
The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-ending state) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, an ending state),
The acquisition number display means is
In the first advantageous gaming state, the number of wins calculated according to the number of bets is updated at the timing when the number of bets is set, and the number of wins calculated according to the number of bets is updated at the timing when the gaming value is assigned, and the number of wins is updated according to the assigned gaming value at the timing when the gaming value is assigned. Update the calculated acquisition number display (for example, FIG. 46(a)),
In the second advantageous gaming state, the display of the number of wins calculated according to the number of bets is not updated at the timing when the number of bets is set, and the awarded gaming value and the corresponding amount are displayed at the timing when the gaming value is assigned. It is means for updating the display of the number of wins calculated according to the number of bets set in the game (for example, FIG. 46(b)),
This is the fourth basic configuration.

According to the fourth basic configuration, in the first advantageous gaming state, the number of wins is displayed in response to an increase or decrease opportunity, while in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of wins is displayed is updated at an opportunity to increase the gaming value. , it is possible to prevent players from feeling that their gaming value is decreasing.

In the fourth basic configuration,
Internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) that determines internal winning combinations based on lottery information;
A gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the gaming state;
Equipped with
The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which an operation mode (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the internal winning combination is notified,
The gaming state control means is a means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when an updated value (for example, the number of medals acquired) that is updated as the game progresses reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, 2400 medals);
The gaming state control means is means for shifting to the second gaming state when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the first gaming state (for example, the number of acquired coins reaches 2000 coins),
The second gaming state is a state in which it is possible to specify that the updated value reaches the predetermined upper limit;
This is a preferred configuration D1.

According to the preferred configuration D1, in the second advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to specify that the advantageous gaming state will end, the winning number display is not updated when the number of bets is set, and the gaming value is Since the acquisition number display is updated when the number increases, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the game value is decreasing.

In a preferred configuration D1,
comprising an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section) that includes the advantageous gaming state,
The acquisition number display means is
In the first advantageous gaming state, updating the number of acquisitions based on a first counter (for example, a net increase number counter) that counts the gaming value in the advantageous gaming state;
In the second advantageous gaming state, means for updating the number of wins based on a second counter (for example, MY counter) that counts the gaming value in the advantageous section;
the updated value is the value of the second counter;
This is a preferred configuration D2.

According to the preferred configuration D2, in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of wins is displayed with reference to a counter that is counted after the start of the advantageous section, so it feels like the game value has been acquired up to the upper limit of the advantageous section. can be given to the player.

In a preferred configuration D2,
The gaming state control means is a means for ending the advantageous gaming state if a specific condition is satisfied before the updated value reaches the predetermined upper limit value (for example, the number of stocks in the AT state is 0). ,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the advantageous period ends together with the first gaming state, both the first counter and the second counter are initialized,
When the specific condition is satisfied in the first gaming state and the first gaming state ends, but the advantageous period continues, the first counter is initialized, while the second counter is initialized. counters are not initialized,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D3.

According to the preferred configuration D3, the second counter is not initialized even after the first advantageous gaming state ends, so the player can grasp the number of wins in the advantageous section.

(5) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered. Furthermore, since the operation request performance continues despite the medal setting action, there is a possibility that the user may suspect that the medal setting action was not effective.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that can achieve both smooth game progress and performance progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance. .

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation device at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The performance means is configured to perform a first response performance (for example, a first operation response performance that displays a performance image d32) when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is a viable means,
The effect means produces a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays)
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is a viable means,
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 47);
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, when performing an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means at the first timing and the second timing, the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated. Even in such a case, since the second response performance is executed, it is possible to achieve both smooth game progress and performance progress.

In the fifth basic configuration,
The performance means is a means for not performing the first response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated.
This is a preferred configuration E1.

According to the preferred configuration E1, the first response performance can be a special performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated.

In the fifth basic configuration or preferred configuration E1,
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated.
This is a preferred configuration E2.

According to the preferred configuration E2, the second response performance is executed even when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated, and even when the second operation means is operated. This can be a common performance.

In the fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, or preferred configuration E2,
Provided with an award determining means (for example, the main control unit 300, etc.) that determines the award of benefits advantageous to the player (for example, the award of the number of AT stocks, the award of pseudo bonuses, the transition to a specialized state, etc.),
The first response performance is a performance that can specify whether or not an advantageous benefit will be granted (for example, FIG. 47),
The second response performance is a performance that can specify the content of the benefit to be granted (for example, FIG. 47),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E3.

According to the preferred configuration E3, even if the first response performance is not executed, the second response performance can be executed, the content of the bonus to be given can be grasped, and the interest of the operation promotion performance can be increased. It can prevent it from being scratched.

In the fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, or preferred configuration E3,
The first operation means is an operation means related to execution of the performance,
The second operation means is an operation means related to the progress of the game,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E4.

According to the preferred configuration E4, even if the operation means related to the progress of the game is operated while the operation promotion effect of the operation means related to the execution of the effect is being performed, the response effect is executed, so that the game can be played smoothly. Operations related to progress can be performed, and since the response performance is not completely canceled, the contents of the response performance can also be grasped.

In the fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, preferred configuration E3, or preferred configuration E4,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
Equipped with
Each of the first timing and the second timing is included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is the timing after the performance means executes the first response performance (for example, FIG. 47);
This is a preferred configuration E5.

According to the preferred configuration E5, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice in one game, and stepwise notification can be performed between the first operation and the second operation.

In a preferred configuration E5,
The performance means is means that does not execute either the first response performance or the second response performance if the rotation start instruction is received before executing the first response performance,
The performance means executes the first response performance and does not perform the second response performance if the rotation start instruction is received before executing the second response performance. be,
This is a preferred configuration E6.

According to the preferred configuration E6, if a response effect is executed even when a start operation is detected, it becomes difficult to understand what is being announced, and there is a risk that the player may be confused. confusion can be prevented.

In the fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, preferred configuration E3, preferred configuration E4, preferred configuration E5, or preferred configuration E6,
Internal winning result determining means (for example, main control unit 300, internal winning combination lottery processing) that determines internal winning combinations based on lottery information;
The internal winning combinations include replaying roles (for example, replaying roles 1, 2, etc.),
a first light emitting unit (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that indicates that an operation to the first operating unit can be accepted;
a second light emitting unit (for example, a bet button 132 lamp) that indicates that an operation on the second operating unit can be accepted;
Equipped with
The first light emitting means is a means that emits light when the performance means is performing either the first operation promotion performance or the second operation promotion performance,
The second light emitting means is configured to cause the presentation means to display either the first operation promotion presentation or the second operation promotion presentation even if the replay winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is a means of emitting light when running,
This is a preferred configuration E7.

According to the preferred configuration E7, when the start operation is performed, the response performance is canceled, so in the case of winning a re-gaming combination, it is effective to accept the operation for both the first operation means and the second operation means. It is possible to notify that any response performance is executable.

(A) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not hinder smooth game progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A grant determining means (for example, the main control unit 300, etc.) that determines the grant of benefits advantageous to the player (for example, the grant of the number of AT stocks, the grant of pseudo bonuses, the transition to a specialized state, etc.);
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays)
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94). ,
The performance means is a means for executing the second operation promotion performance after performing the first response performance (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The first response performance is a performance derived when the benefit is granted (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The second response performance is a performance that can specify the content of the benefit to be granted (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
This is called basic configuration A.

According to basic configuration A, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated Even if the second response effect is executed, the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the second response performance is executed after the first response performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the performance from progressing unintentionally by the player. can proceed. In addition, even if the first response performance is not executed, the second response performance can be executed, and the content of the bonus to be granted can be grasped, thereby preventing the operation promotion performance from losing interest. can do.

(B) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not hinder smooth game progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
a first light emitting unit (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that indicates that an operation to the first operating unit can be accepted;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A grant determining means (for example, the main control unit 300, etc.) that determines the grant of benefits advantageous to the player (for example, grant of AT stock number, grant of pseudo bonus, transition to specialized state, etc.);
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation device at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means produces a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays)
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94). ,
The first light emitting means is a means that emits light when the effect means is performing either the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94 ),
The first light emitting means emits light when the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing. (for example, FIG. 95(b)),
The first response performance is a performance derived when the benefit is granted (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The second response performance is a performance that can specify the content of the bonus to be granted (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
This is called basic configuration B.

According to basic configuration B, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated Even if the second response effect is executed, the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. Further, even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing, the first light emitting means is configured to emit light when the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing. Therefore, even if the player accidentally touches the first operation means, the player can understand that the operation promotion effect is effective. In addition, even if the first response performance is not executed, the second response performance can be executed, and the content of the bonus to be granted can be grasped, thereby preventing the operation promotion performance from losing its interest. can do.

In basic configuration B,
The first light emitting means emits light when the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing. (for example, FIG. 95(b)),
This is a preferred configuration B11.

According to preferred configuration B11, even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing, the first light emitting means is activated when the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing. Since the player is configured to emit light, even if the first operation means continues to be operated during the execution of the first operation promotion effect, the player will know that the second operation promotion effect is valid. be able to.

(C) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not hinder smooth game progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A grant determining means (for example, the main control unit 300, etc.) that determines the grant of benefits advantageous to the player (for example, the grant of the number of AT stocks, the grant of pseudo bonuses, the transition to a specialized state, etc.);
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94). ,
The presentation means is a means for performing the first operation promotion presentation at the first timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing (for example, 95(b)),
The first response performance is a performance derived when the benefit is granted (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The second response performance is a performance that can specify the content of the benefit to be granted (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
This is called basic configuration C.

According to basic configuration C, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated Even if the second response effect is executed, the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. Further, even if the first operating means is operated before the first timing, the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing, so that the first operating means may be suddenly activated. Even if the user touches the button, the operation promotion effect is not canceled, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, even if the first response performance is not executed, the second response performance can be executed, and the content of the bonus to be granted can be grasped, thereby preventing the operation promotion performance from losing its interest. can do.

In the basic configuration C,
The presentation means is a means for executing the second operation promotion presentation at the second timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b)),
This is a preferred configuration C11.

According to the preferred configuration C11, even if the first operation means is operated before the second timing, the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing, so that the first operation promotion effect is executed. Even if the first operating means continues to be operated during execution, the player can understand that the operation promotion effect is effective.

(D) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not hinder smooth game progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94). ,
The performance means is a means for executing the second operation promotion performance after performing the first response performance (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The first operating means is an operating means related to execution of the performance (for example, PUSH button 192),
The second operating means is an operating means related to the progress of the game (for example, the bet button 132),
This is called basic configuration D.

According to basic configuration D, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated Even if it is, the second response effect is executed, so the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the second response performance is executed after the first response performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the performance from progressing unintentionally by the player. can proceed. In addition, even if the operation means related to the progress of the game is operated while the operation promotion effect for the operation means related to the execution of the effect is being executed, the response effect is executed, so that the operations related to the game progress can be performed in a smooth flow. At the same time, it is possible to understand the content of the response performance.

(E) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not hinder smooth game progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
a first light emitting unit (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that indicates that an operation to the first operating unit can be accepted;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94). ,
The first light emitting means is a means that emits light when the effect means is performing either the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect (for example, FIGS. 47 and 94 ),
The first light emitting means emits light when the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing. (for example, FIG. 95(b)),
The first operation means is an operation means related to execution of the performance (for example, PUSH button 192),
The second operation means is an operation means related to the progress of the game (for example, the bet button 132),
Let this be the basic configuration E.

According to basic configuration E, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated Even if it is, the second response effect is executed, so the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. Further, even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing, the first light emitting means is configured to emit light when the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing. Therefore, even if the player accidentally touches the first operation means, the player can understand that the operation promotion effect is effective. In addition, even if the operation means related to the progress of the game is operated while the operation promotion effect for the operation means related to the execution of the effect is being executed, the response effect is executed, so that the operations related to the game progress can be performed in a smooth flow. At the same time, it is possible to understand the content of the response performance.

In the basic configuration E,
The first light emitting means emits light when the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing. (for example, FIG. 95(b)),
This is a preferred configuration E11.

According to the preferred configuration E11, even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing, the first light emitting means is activated when the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing. Since it emits light, even if the first operation means continues to be operated while the first operation promotion effect is being executed, the player can understand that the second operation promotion effect is effective.

(F) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that does not hinder smooth game progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
When the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated, the performance means provides the second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33). is an executable means (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The presentation means is a means for performing the first operation promotion presentation at the first timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing (for example, 95(b)),
The first operation means is an operation means related to execution of the performance (for example, PUSH button 192),
The second operation means is an operation means related to the progress of the game (for example, the bet button 132),
This is called basic configuration F.

According to basic configuration F, when an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means is executed at the first timing and the second timing, when the second operation means that is not prompted to operate is operated Even if it is, the second response effect is executed, so the smooth progress of the game is not hindered. Further, even if the first operating means is operated before the first timing, the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing, so that the first operating means may be suddenly activated. Even if the user touches the button, the operation promotion effect is not canceled, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In addition, even if the operation means related to the progress of the game is operated while the operation promotion effect for the operation means related to the execution of the effect is being executed, the response effect is executed, so that the operations related to the game progress can be performed in a smooth flow. At the same time, it is possible to understand the content of the response performance.

In the basic configuration F,
The presentation means is a means for executing the second operation promotion presentation at the second timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b)),
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F11.

According to the preferred configuration F11, even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing, the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing, so the second operation promotion effect is executed. Even if the first operation means continues to be operated during execution, the player can understand that the second operation promotion effect is effective.

(G) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-158941).

However, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest when executing the operation request performance.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that increases interest when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation device at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means produces a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The presentation means is a means for executing the second operation promotion presentation after executing the first response presentation (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is the timing after the performance means executes the first response performance (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
Let this be the basic configuration G.

According to the basic configuration G, when executing an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means at the first timing and the second timing, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice within one game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a step-by-step response performance. Furthermore, since the configuration is such that the second response performance is executed after the first response performance is executed, it is possible to prevent the performance from progressing unintentionally by the player. It is possible to advance the game, thereby increasing interest.

(H) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-158941).

However, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest when executing the operation request performance.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that increases interest when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
a first light emitting unit (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that indicates that an operation to the first operating unit can be accepted;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The first light emitting means is a means that emits light when the effect means is performing either the first operation promotion effect or the second operation promotion effect (for example, FIGS. 47 and 94 ),
The first light emitting means emits light when the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing. (for example, FIG. 95(b)),
The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is the timing after the performance means executes the first response performance (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
Let this be the basic configuration H.

According to the basic configuration H, when executing an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means at the first timing and the second timing, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice within one game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a step-by-step response performance. Further, even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing, the first light emitting means is configured to emit light when the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing. Therefore, even if the player accidentally touches the first operation means, the player can understand that the operation promotion performance is effective, and can increase interest.

In the basic configuration H,
The first light emitting means emits light when the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing. (for example, FIG. 95(b)),
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration H11.

According to the preferred configuration H11, even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing, the first light emitting means is activated when the second operation promotion effect is executed at the second timing. Since it emits light, even if the first operation means continues to be operated during execution of the first operation promotion effect, the player can understand that the second operation promotion effect is effective.

(I) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-158941).

However, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest when executing the operation request performance.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that increases interest when performing an operation request performance.

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The presentation means provides a first operation promotion presentation (for example, a first operation promotion presentation that displays a presentation image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation). ) is a viable means of
The effect means creates a second operation promotion effect (e.g., effect image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing (e.g., after displaying effect image d32). (a second operation promotion display that displays a second operation promotion effect),
The presentation means is configured to provide a first response presentation (for example, a first operation response presentation displaying a presentation image d32) when the first operation promotion presentation is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The performance means is configured to perform a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated. is an executable means (e.g., FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
The presentation means is a means for performing the first operation promotion presentation at the first timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the first timing (for example, 95(b)),
The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is the timing after the performance means executes the first response performance (for example, FIG. 47, FIG. 94),
This is called basic configuration I.

According to basic configuration I, when executing the operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means at the first timing and the second timing, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice within one game. Therefore, it is possible to perform a step-by-step response performance. Further, even if the first operating means is operated before the first timing, the first operation promotion effect is executed at the first timing, so that the first operating means may be suddenly activated. Even if the player touches the screen, the player can understand that the operation promotion effect is effective, and can increase interest.

In basic configuration I,
The presentation means is a means for executing the second operation promotion presentation at the second timing even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b)),
This is a preferred configuration I1.

According to the preferred configuration I1, even if the first operation means has been operated before the second timing, the second operation promotion effect is not canceled at the second timing, so that the first operation promotion effect is not canceled. Even if the first operation means continues to be operated during execution, the player can understand that the second operation promotion effect is effective.

(6) The game machine executes an operation request performance that requests an operation on a performance button, and when the performance button is operated, the gaming machine executes a response performance in response to the operation of the performance button. exist. In addition, if a bet operation or medal insertion operation is performed instead of an operation on the production button while an operation request production is being executed (hereinafter referred to as a medal setting action), the execution of the response production will be canceled and the production for the next game will be executed. There are also cases where it is done. In this regard, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-158941 discloses a gaming machine that can continue the operation request performance and derive a response performance even if a medal setting action is performed while the operation request performance is being executed. ing.

However, as in the game machine shown in the above-mentioned document, if the operation request performance continues even after the medal setting action is performed, there is a risk that smooth progress of the game will be hindered. Furthermore, since the operation request performance continues despite the medal setting action, there is a possibility that the user may suspect that the medal setting action was not effective.

The present embodiment has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that can achieve both smooth game progress and performance progress even if a medal setting action is performed when performing an operation request performance. .

According to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of this embodiment,
A first operation means (for example, PUSH button 192) that can be operated by the player and is related to execution of the performance;
a second operation means (for example, bet button 132) that can be operated by the player and is related to the progress of the game;
a first light emitting unit (for example, a PUSH button 192 lamp) that indicates that an operation to the first operating unit can be accepted;
a second light emitting means (for example, a bet button 132 lamp) that indicates that an operation on the second operation means can be accepted;
Production means (for example, production image display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500, etc.) that executes production;
A game machine comprising:
The performance means is a means capable of performing an operation promotion performance (for example, a first operation promotion performance that displays a performance image d31) that prompts the operation of the first operation means,
When the operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated, the performance means provides a response performance (for example, a first operation response performance that displays a performance image d32, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33, etc.). (2) is a means that can execute the operation response performance),
The performance means is a means capable of executing the response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33) when the operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated. can be,
The first light emitting means is a means for emitting light when the operation promotion effect is executed, regardless of the lottery result of the internal winning combination,
The second light emitting means is a means for emitting light regardless of the lottery result of the internal winning combination when the operation promotion effect is executed (for example, FIG. 47);
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to the sixth basic configuration, even if the second operating means is operated while ignoring the operation prompt for the first operating means, the content of the response performance can be grasped. When the operation promotion effect is executed, the second light emitting means is made to emit light regardless of the lottery result, so it is possible to notify that the operation on the second operation means is valid. In other words, it is possible to achieve both smooth game progress and performance progress.

In the sixth basic configuration,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
Equipped with
The operation promotion performance includes a first operation promotion performance (for example, a first operation promotion performance that displays the performance image d31) executed at a first timing (for example, after the third stop operation), and a first operation promotion performance (for example, a first operation promotion performance that displays the performance image d31). a second operation promotion performance (for example, a second operation promotion performance that displays the performance image d31) that is executed at a second timing after the timing (for example, after displaying the performance image d32);
The response performance includes a first response performance (for example, a first operation response performance that displays a performance image d32) and a second response performance (for example, a second operation response performance that displays a performance image d33). , including;
The performance means is a means capable of executing the first response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
Each of the first timing and the second timing is included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is a timing after the performance means executes the first response performance,
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F1.

According to the preferred configuration F1, the operation promotion effect can be executed twice in one game, and stepwise notification can be performed between the first operation and the second operation.

In a preferred configuration F1,
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated,
The performance means is a means capable of executing the second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the second operation means is operated.
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F2.

According to the preferred configuration F2, the second response performance is executed even when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated, and even when the second operation means is operated. This can be a common performance.

In the preferred configuration F1 or preferred configuration F2,
The second operation means is an operation means for setting the game value provided for the game as the number of bets,
The second light-emitting means is a means that does not emit light when a re-game is established in which the game can be played without setting the game value as the number of bets, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed;
The second light-emitting means is a means for emitting light when a re-game in which the game can be played without setting the game value as the number of bets is established, and when the operation promotion effect is executed.
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F3.

According to the preferred configuration F3, in the case of winning a re-gaming combination, it is possible to indicate that the operation reception on the second operation means is valid and to notify that the response performance can also be executed.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Modifications may be made, and those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. In addition, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are those described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to things.

[Third embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A slot machine according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of the present embodiment described below starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. At the same time, based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually rotates by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the winning combination based on the lottery result and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game will end. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out game media.

First, the basic configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front side of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Be prepared. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. To explain specifically using FIG. 2, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure) is displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure). The symbol displayed on the left reel 110 is the middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed on the left reel lower row, and the symbol displayed on the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram) The symbol is the upper symbol of the middle reel, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel. The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 112, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 as shown in the figure) are the upper row symbols of the right reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 as shown in the diagram) on the right reel. The middle symbols and the symbols displayed at the bottom of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 to 112 through the display window 113. Three of each are displayed vertically, nine in total. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the display window 113 is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this optical sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates a valid winning line. The winning line is a line on which it is determined whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed, which will be explained later in FIG. Only one line, the middle winning line L1, is provided, which is made up of symbols in the middle of the reels. FIG. 50 shows this winning line L1. The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 requires three medals, and when the number of inserted medals is less than three, no winning line becomes valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 validate. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135. Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a downward-sloping winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the upward-to-the-right winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 may indicate, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, BB1, BB2, RB) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a BB1 internal winning, a BB2 internal winning, or an RB internal winning, which will be described later, has been internally won. This lamp informs the player that he or she has won or is in a lottery state of BB1 activation, BB2 activation, or RB activation. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up. Note that the bet buttons 130 to 132 correspond to an example of a bet number operation means.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during BB1 operation). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. Note that in the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same sense as being paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) provided below inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a speaker 272 (see FIG. 51) provided above inside the slot machine 100 outputs sound to the outside. A sound hole 143 is provided for this purpose. This effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and an effect image display device 157 (liquid crystal display) disposed on the back side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (player side, front side). ). Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface. Note that this effect image display device 157 corresponds to an example of display means and effect means.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 51. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. Here, regarding the main control unit 300, if the data capacity becomes large, it becomes difficult to check the program, and the security deteriorates, such as becoming a breeding ground for unauthorized modification. There are limits to the data capacity of the RAM 308. The main control section 300 corresponds to an example of a bet number setting means, a stop control means, a game state setting means, and a section setting means. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 corresponds to an example of a production setting means.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 that stores arrays, stop positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms. Note that the RAM 308 stores credit values and corresponds to an example of a gaming value storage means.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, the optical sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled (the value stored in the RAM 308 is cleared and the same number of medals are discharged). The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the left reel 110, the optical sensor of the middle reel 111, and the optical sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112. Each time a piece passes, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game status) is output.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period outputted by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel lamp, bet button lamp, (reel backlight, etc.) is connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 52. This figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 21 symbols with numbers 0 to 20) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 is a "replay symbol," the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 is a "bell symbol," and the number 3 piece on the right reel 112 is a "BB1 symbol." ” are arranged respectively.

In order to improve the interest of the game, the slot machine 100 in this embodiment is designed to stop the corresponding reels 110 to 112 within the maximum pull-in range (less than 5 frames in this embodiment) from the position where the stop operation is performed. It is configured.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 53. This figure is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including active winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the payout (number of awards) of each winning combination.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include BB1, BB2, RB, cherry, watermelon, common bell, middle bell, single-card winning combinations A to F, and replays (common replays, promoted replays 1 to 4). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted. Note that "winning" in this embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an active combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve payout of medals) is displayed on the active line.

BB1, BB2, and RB are winning combinations (activation combinations) that shift to a state (BB1 activation state, BB2 activation state, and RB activation state, respectively) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 200 medals are awarded in the BB1 operating state, 200 medals are awarded in the BB2 operating state, and 48 medals are awarded in the RB operating state. Note that for BB1, BB2, and RB, medals are not paid out due to winning the winning combination itself. Note that in the following description, BB1, BB2, and RB may be collectively referred to as a bonus.

When BB1, BB2, and RB are internally won, the internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set on (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the BB1 internal winning state when the flag corresponding to BB1 is set to on, and shifts the gaming state to the BB1 internal winning state when the flag corresponding to BB2 is set to on. If the state is shifted to the BB2 internal winning state and the flag corresponding to RB is set on, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the RB internal winning state. These flags remain on until the corresponding activation combination is won, making it easier to win these activation combinations in subsequent games. In other words, even if you do not win any of those roles in a game where BB1, BB2, and RB are internally won, in subsequent games, you will be in the same state as when BB1, BB2, and RB were internally won, and the corresponding symbol combinations will be aligned. It will be easier to win prizes. In addition, in the BB1 internal winning state, BB2 internal winning state, and RB internal winning state, if a role other than BB1, BB2, or RB is internally won, the symbols constituting this other role will be given priority. Reel stop control is executed so that the reels are aligned.

Replay is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. In other words, the game can be played again with the same number of bets as the number of coins inserted last time. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. In addition, at the time of promotion replay winning, the symbol combination of common replay stops at the lower row. Then, if a player wins a promotion replay in RT1, which will be described later, the process will proceed to RT2, which will be described later (see the remarks column in FIG. 53). Note that the above-mentioned replay may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. For example, if the player wins a replay, the medals will be automatically inserted in the next game (stored in the RAM 308). The number of inserted medals may be reset in a prepared medal input number storage area), or the medals inserted in the replay winning game can be carried over and used as they are in the next game. Good too.

Cherry, watermelon, common bell, middle bell, and one-card winning combinations A to F are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The corresponding symbol combinations and payout numbers are as shown in FIG. 53.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, the types of internal winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing internal winning combinations and winning probabilities. Further, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing details of some internal winning combinations.

FIG. 54 shows a table of internal winning combinations that are combinations of the winning combinations described in FIG. 53 and a plurality of types of winning probabilities for each of them. These tables correspond to the lottery states described later, and include RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1 internal winning, BB1 activation, BB2 internal winning, BB2 activation, RB internal winning, and RB activation. Among these, RT0 and RT1 have a common winning probability, and FIG. 54 shows the values of this winning probability. Further, in the same figure, the winning probabilities of RT0 and RT1 are used as a standard (hereinafter referred to as standard winning probabilities), and tables other than RT0 and RT1 are indicated by the presence or absence of variation from the standard winning probabilities. For example, in RT2, BB1 internal election, BB2 internal election, and RB internal election, it is shown that the winning probability of replay (common replay, promoted replay) increases with respect to the standard winning probability. Further, for example, it has been shown that in BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation, the winning probability of the common bell increases with respect to the standard winning probability.

The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to the internal winning combination shown in FIG. These internal winning combinations are determined by lottery at the start of the game. In the following explanation of this operation, it may be referred to as internally winning a winning combination.

The replay in FIG. 54 includes NRP and RPGr in FIG. 55. The NRP is internally won independently in the common replay, and when this NRP is internally won, the symbol combination of the common replay is stopped regardless of the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are pressed. RPGr is internally won over and over again in common replay and promoted replay, and if RPGr is internally won, the stop button 137 to 139 will be stopped in the correct order (in this example, center right, left). For example, one of the symbol combinations of the promoted replay will stop, and if the operation order is not correct, the symbol combination of the common replay will stop.

BEGr1 to 6 are internally won in duplicate with the middle bell and one card role, and when BEGr1 to 6 are internally won, the stop operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 are the correct operation order corresponding to each. (See Figure 55), the symbol combination of the middle bell will stop (8 pieces paid out), and if the operation order is not correct, either the 1-card role or the losing symbol combination will stop (1 or 0 pieces). payout).

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, setting values are set that give different degrees of advantage to players. Settings 1 to 6 are prepared as setting values. There is a tendency that the higher the set value, the higher the player's advantage.

Further, in this embodiment, the internal winning probabilities of the internal winning combinations of BEGr1 to BEGr6 are equal, but the internal winning probabilities may be biased.

If the winning combination is not won for each internal winning combination, it is a loss, and basically the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. Note that the fact that the winning symbol combination is not stopped on the winning line may be referred to as "losing". Also, not winning any of the internally elected roles may be expressed as "winning by mistake."

<Type of lottery status>
Next, types of lottery states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 and changes in lottery states will be explained. FIG. 56 is a transition diagram of the lottery state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 is configured to be able to switch between different states of advantage for the player by switching between a plurality of lottery tables as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the state corresponding to this lottery table will be referred to as a lottery state. As shown in FIG. 56, the lottery states include RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1 internal selection, BB1 activation, BB2 internal selection, BB2 activation, RB internal selection, and RB activation. The lottery state is controlled by the main control section 300.

RT0 has the lowest replay internal winning probability and is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Note that this is also the initial state in this embodiment.

RT1 has the lowest replay internal winning probability and is the most disadvantageous state for the player.

RT2 is more advantageous to the player than RT0 and RT1 because the replay internal winning probability is higher than that of RT0 and RT1.

BB1 internal winning, BB2 internal winning, and RB internal winning are states in which the internal winning flags corresponding to BB1, BB2, and RB are set to ON, respectively. In these lottery states, it is easy to shift to BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation. However, as mentioned above, if other winning combinations other than BB1, BB2, and RB are internally won, reel stop control is executed so that the symbols constituting the other winning combinations are arranged preferentially. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to BB1 operation, BB2 operation, or RB operation.

BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation are advantageous states in which it is easier to obtain medals because the internal winning probability of the common bell is higher than in other lottery states.

FIG. 56 shows the lottery states described above, and the symbols (A) to (K) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the lottery states. When each transition condition is met, the lottery state transitions in the direction of the arrow. In addition, "missing the middle bell" as indicated by code (A) means that when BEGr1 to 6 (see Figures 54 and 55) are internally won, the middle bell is won because the stop operation was not in the correct operation order. It means there wasn't.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, types of gaming states of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49 and changes in gaming states will be explained. FIG. 57 is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 49, as shown in FIG. 57, the gaming states are normal state A, normal state B, CZ state, bonus state A, AT state (normal AT state and upper AT state), and bonus state B. (upper AT preparation state A, upper AT preparation state B). Each gaming state will be explained below.

The normal state A is set in the first game after changing the settings or clearing the RAM. From this normal state A, if the payout combination (BB1, BB2, RB, roles excluding replay) is internally won and the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won, the state shifts to normal state B (transition condition (A) in Fig. 57). ). Note that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to this advantageous section is 1/1.1, and the system is configured to immediately transition to normal state B. Furthermore, if BB1, BB2, or RB wins, the state shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 57).

Normal state B is a gaming state in which the player mainly stays. In this normal state B, a transition is made to the CZ state by playing the set scheduled number of games (transition condition (B) in FIG. 57). Furthermore, by winning the AT direct lottery, the state shifts to the normal AT state (transition condition (D) in FIG. 57). Furthermore, if BB1, BB2, or RB wins, the state shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 57).

In the CZ state, an effect that makes the player expect a transition to the normal AT state is executed. In this CZ state, if the AT lottery is won, the state shifts to the normal AT state (transition condition (E) in FIG. 57), and if it is not won, the state shifts to the normal state B (transition condition (C) in FIG. 57). Note that when transitioning to the normal AT state, the number of AT remaining games is set. Furthermore, if BB1, BB2, or RB wins, the state shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 57). Note that when a prize is won in BB1, BB2, or RB, the number of AT remaining games is set (AT state transition confirmed), but it may be configured such that it is not set.

In the normal AT state, when RPGr and BEGr1 to BEGr6 are internally selected, the correct operation order is announced. By following this notification, the promotion replay will be won and the lottery state will shift to RT2. In RT2, the internal winning probability of replay increases, so the decrease in medals is suppressed. Furthermore, since it becomes easier to win the middle bell, it becomes possible for the player to earn more profits. This normal AT state transitions to normal state A when the set number of AT remaining games becomes 0 (transition condition (F) in FIG. 57). Note that the number of AT remaining games may be added by lottery. Furthermore, when winning in BB1, BB2, and RB, the state shifts to bonus state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 57), but at this time, the number of AT remaining games may be added. Furthermore, when the conditions for transition to the higher AT state are satisfied (for example, winning a lottery for each game, winning a lottery based on an internal winning combination, internally winning a specific combination), the transition to the higher AT state occurs (Fig. 57 transition condition (J)). Conditions for transitioning to a higher AT state include, for example, when there is a predetermined number or more of rights to continue the normal AT state, such as the number of remaining AT games, or when the number of games or the number of acquired coins is close to the limit value (or the number of coins acquired is close to the limit value) ), and any condition may be adopted as appropriate.

Bonus state A is also a lottery state in which BB1 is activated, BB2 is activated, or RB is activated, and when the specified number of coins are paid out for these states, it shifts to either normal state B or normal AT state. do. Specifically, if the number of remaining AT games is 0 (if there is no AT right), the transition is to normal state B (transition condition (H) in Figure 57), and if the number of remaining AT games is not 0 (if there is no AT right) (if there is), the state transitions to the normal AT state (transition condition (I) in FIG. 57). Note that the transition destination after the bonus state A ends may not be the normal state B, but any state in the non-advantageous section, and furthermore, when transitioning from this non-advantageous section to the next advantageous section, the transition destination is the bonus state A. The degree of advantage may be increased based on the internal winning (or winning) of some combination in the previous internal winning state (or the previous internal winning state).

In the higher AT state, the correct operation order is announced as in the normal AT state, and the player is in a state where he or she can earn more profits. Upon transition to this higher AT state, the number of remaining sets is set. When the number of remaining AT games is 0, the value of the number of remaining sets is subtracted by 1 and the number of remaining AT games is added by 20 (the number of sets of 1 corresponds to the number of remaining AT games of 20). That is, the number of remaining AT games and the number of remaining sets are managed in order to continue the upper AT state. In addition, in the upper AT state, the number of remaining sets may be added by lottery. Furthermore, when comparing the number of AT remaining games, the higher AT state has a higher number of additions to the number of remaining AT games (or the addition is larger) than the normal AT state, and is therefore more advantageous than the normal AT state. It has become. In this higher AT state, when BB1, BB2, and RB win, the state shifts to the higher AT preparation state A (transition condition (G) in FIG. 57). Note that when transitioning from the higher AT state to the higher AT preparation state A, the number of AT remaining games is cleared.

In the upper AT preparation state A, the lottery state is any one of BB1 operation, BB2 operation, and RB operation. When the specified number of coins are paid out for these states, the state shifts to normal state A (transition condition (K) in FIG. 57). In addition, if the payout combination (BB1, BB2, RB, roles excluding replay) is won internally and the transition lottery is won before the prescribed number of coins are paid out, the system will transition to the higher AT preparation state B (transition conditions in Figure 57). (A)). Note that the winning probability of this transition lottery is 1/1.1, and the system is configured to immediately transition to the higher AT preparation state B.

The upper AT preparation state B is a state in which the lottery state (BB1 operation, BB2 operation, RB operation) in the upper AT preparation state A continues. When the specified number of coins are paid out for these states, the state shifts to the upper AT state (transition condition (K) in FIG. 57). Note that upon transition to the higher AT state, the number of AT remaining games is newly set.

The gaming states explained above are those belonging to the non-advantageous section (normal state A, higher AT preparation state A) and those belonging to the advantageous section (normal state B, CZ state, bonus state A, normal AT state, upper AT state). state, upper AT preparation state B). In the advantageous section, upper limits are set for the number of games played and the number of coins paid out to prevent gambling from becoming too high, and when this limiter is reached, the game enters the non-advantageous section (normal state A). It is configured to return (transition condition (L) in FIG. 57).

FIG. 57 shows the gaming states described above, and the symbols (A) to (L) attached to the arrows are transition conditions between the gaming states. When each transition condition is met, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow. Note that the transition conditions described above are merely examples, and other conditions may be adopted instead of these conditions. For example, the transition to the AT state is confirmed when BB1, BB2, or RB is won, or when each bonus is used up and a lottery is selected according to the winning combination (or not according to the winning combination). It may be when you win.

<Processing overview>
The processing of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, and second sub-control section 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 58 in accordance with the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (by care or by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a replay in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are inserted, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number (3) of medals have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, the internal lottery table for winning combinations stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current lottery state, and an internal lottery (winning combination) is performed using this and the random numbers obtained from the random number generation circuit 316. , executes processes such as determining internal winning combinations, AT lottery, and adding up the number of AT remaining games (various lottery processes).

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, status update processing is executed. Specifically, processing such as transition of lottery state and gaming state is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control section timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 60. Note that FIG. 60(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 60(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 60(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of the input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing information representing the gaming state are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 60(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 60(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 60(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S315 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 61. Note that FIG. 61(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 61(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 61(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 61(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 61(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, etc. are performed.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 61(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 61(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 61(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 61(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

≪Operation example explanation≫
Hereinafter, the features of the slot machine 100 described above will be explained using an operation example.

[Example of transition from normal AT state to higher AT state via bonus state B]
Hereinafter, an example of transition from the normal AT state to the higher AT state through the bonus state B and to the higher AT state will be described using FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 is a timing chart showing an example of transition from the normal AT state to the higher AT state through the bonus state B and to the higher AT state. Further, FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the state of the game machine along the timing chart of FIG. 62.

In this example, the gaming state is the normal AT state, and the operation from the state where the performance during the normal AT accompanying this is being executed will be explained. In the performance during normal AT, the number of remaining AT games is displayed at the top left of the screen, and the number of coins acquired after entering the normal AT state is displayed at the top right (see FIG. 63(a)). As for the lottery status, it is assumed that the lottery status is RT2 as a result of following the correct operation order (FIG. 55) that is announced when RPGr and BEGr1 to BEGr6 are internally won.

Here, it is assumed that the batting order bell (in this case, BEGr4 in FIG. 55) is internally elected at the timing shown in FIG. 62(a). FIG. 63(a) shows how the correct operation order (in this case, center, right, left) is announced for this batting order bell. Furthermore, assume that the batting order bell (here, BEGr4 in FIG. 55) is internally elected at the timing shown in FIG. 62(b), which is later than FIG. 62(a). FIG. 63(b) shows how the correct operation order (in this case, center, right, left) is announced for this batting order bell. Note that FIG. 63(b) shows that the number of AT remaining games is smaller and the number of acquired coins is larger than in FIG. 63(a).

Subsequently, it is assumed that the condition for transition to the higher AT state is satisfied and the transition to the higher AT state is made at the timing shown in FIG. 62(c). In the performance during high-level AT, the number of remaining AT games and the number of sets (the number of subtractions from the number of sets) are displayed at the top left of the screen. Further, in the upper right corner, the number of coins acquired since the normal AT state is entered is continuously displayed (see FIG. 63(c)). Furthermore, in the lottery state, as in the normal AT state, RT2 continues as a result of following the correct operation order (FIG. 55).

Here, it is assumed that the batting order bell (BEGr6 in FIG. 55 in this case) is internally elected at the timing shown in FIG. 62(c). FIG. 63(c) shows how the correct operation order (here, right-center-left) is announced for this batting order bell.

Next, assume that BB1 is internally won at the timing shown in FIG. 62(d) (BB1 is not won in this game). At this stage, the gaming state remains in the upper AT state, but the lottery state shifts to BB1 internal winning. Furthermore, in addition to the performance during the higher AT, a performance announcing the internal winning of BB1 is performed. FIG. 63(d) shows that the symbol combination of BB1 is displayed as this notification effect.

Suppose that the player wins BB1 at the timing shown in FIG. 62(e). FIG. 63(e) shows the situation at the timing when BB1 of FIG. 62(e) is won. In this case, the state changes from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section, and from the next game, the gaming state shifts to the upper AT preparation state A of the bonus state B, and the lottery state shifts to BB1 operation. Further, the performance during the higher AT is switched to the performance during the bonus (see FIG. 63(f)). During the bonus performance, the number of coins acquired in the game is displayed at the top left of the screen, and the number of coins acquired after the normal AT state is continuously displayed at the top right of the screen.

Furthermore, assume that the common bell is internally won at the timing shown in FIG. 62(f), and furthermore, that the common bell is won in the lottery for moving to an advantageous section when the common bell is internally won. FIG. 63(f) shows the situation at the timing when the common bell of FIG. 62(f) is won. In this case, the state changes from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, and from the next game the gaming state shifts to the higher AT preparation state B of the bonus state B, but the lottery state remains in the BB1 operation. In addition, the effect during the bonus (see FIG. 63(f)) is continuously executed.

After that, it is assumed that a specified number of coins are paid out in response to the BB1 operation. FIG. 63(g) shows the state at the end of the upper AT preparation state B (FIG. 62(g)). In this case, from the next game, the higher AT preparation state B will be shifted to the higher AT state, and the lottery state will shift to RT0. Here, the performance during the top AT is executed, but the number of remaining AT games and the number of sets displayed at the top left of the screen, and the number of acquired coins at the top right of the screen are newly accumulated (the previous values are reset) ) (see FIG. 63(h)).

Here, it is assumed that the batting order bell (BEGr6 in FIG. 55 in this case) is internally elected at the timing shown in FIG. 62(h). FIG. 63(h) shows that the correct operation order (here, right-center-left) is announced for this batting order bell.

In addition, in the upper AT state, by following the correct operation order (Fig. 55) that is announced when RPGr and BEGr 1 to 6 are internally won, the lottery state moves from RT1 to RT2, which becomes an advantageous state for the player. .

In the above-described flow, higher AT states may be consecutive with bonus state B in between, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the above example, the configuration is such that effects corresponding to each of the normal AT state, higher AT state, and bonus state B (higher AT preparation state A, higher AT preparation state B) are executed. Even in state B, the performance of the upper AT state may be continued as is. With this configuration, by taking over the performance, it is possible to give the impression that the upper AT state is continuing, giving the player a sense of elation.

Furthermore, in the above example, the number of coins earned after entering the normal AT state is continuously displayed until the end of bonus state B, giving the impression that the player is gaining more profits. can be given. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the number of acquired coins may be reset once the advantageous period ends (FIG. 62(e)).

Further, in the above example, the number of acquired coins is reset when the upper AT state is entered for the second time (FIG. 63(h)). Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there are machines that initialize both the main control section and the sub-control section when the advantageous section ends, and there are machines that have an upper limit on the number of acquired coins that can be displayed. The above configuration can be applied. In addition, in the case of the latter specification, it may be configured such that the number of acquired coins is reset when it is close to the upper limit value, and the acquired number of coins is inherited in other cases. Note that the display of the number of AT remaining games and the number of sets may be reset together with the number of acquired coins.

Further, the number of acquired coins may be displayed until the acquired number reaches the upper limit value, and when the upper limit value is reached, a specific effect may be performed without directly expressing the acquired number of coins. For example, a part of the presentation may change (a change in the background, a change in the character's costume), or the display of the number of acquired tokens may change from the number of tokens to some kind of title. As an example, if the upper limit of the number of acquired pieces is 2400 pieces, a first specific effect will be performed as a specific effect for 2400 to 3000 pieces, and a second specific effect will be performed as a specific effect for 3001 to 4000 pieces. By having the effect executed in accordance with the number of obtained coins, such as when the performance is performed, even if the specific value of the obtained number cannot be grasped, it is possible to grasp the rough number of obtained coins depending on the type of specific performance. can. Furthermore, in this case, even if the number of acquired coins is reset in the main control unit 300 when the advantageous section ends, the first sub-control unit 400 may continue counting the number of acquired coins.

Hereinafter, an example of the operation when using the advantageous section lamp 190 and the effect lamp 191 will be further explained.

First, the advantageous section lamp 190 is a lamp that can be turned on during the advantageous section. The advantageous section lamp 190 is configured to be turned on in an advantageous section and turned off in a non-advantageous section, so that it can be recognized that the vehicle is in an advantageous section. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, as shown in FIG. 62, the advantageous section lamp 190 is not turned on at the timing when the advantageous section is set (FIG. 62(f)), and the subsequent operation navigation is possible ( In this case, the light may be turned on at the timing when the state shifts to the upper AT state (FIG. 62(h)), or the light may be turned on at the timing when the operation navigation is executed. Note that instead of the advantageous section lamp 190 that is lit at the timing as described above, a lamp that is lit at least during AT and that is lit in accordance with the output timing of an external output signal indicating that AT is in progress may be provided. Alternatively, the light may be turned off in accordance with the timing at which the output of the external output signal is stopped.

Note that although Figures 62 and 63 show the BB1 win and the end of the advantageous section together (Figures 62(e) and 63(e)), there is actually a weight between the BB1 win and the BB1 activation. Since the advantageous section ends when the BB1 is activated, there is a time lag between winning the BB1 prize and the end of the advantageous section. The advantageous section lamp 190 also turns off at the end of this advantageous section (see the lower diagram in FIG. 62).

The performance lamp 191 is a lamp for increasing the interest of the game. In the examples of FIGS. 62 and 63, the gaming state changes from normal AT state, upper AT state, bonus state B (upper AT preparation state A, upper AT preparation state B), and higher AT state. Once the performance lamp 191 is in the normal AT state, it is configured to continue to be lit until it returns to the normal state A. The effect lamp 191 may be turned off in non-advantageous sections, or may be turned on only in the AT state (normal AT state, upper AT state). However, these configurations may give the player the impression that the AT state has ended, even though the player has won BB1, which is profitable. In particular, unlike the advantageous section lamp 190, the performance lamp is designed to stand out, and this impression may reduce the interest in the game. In the examples of FIGS. 62 and 63, such an impression can be avoided by continuing to light the performance lamp 191. In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which the performance of the higher AT state is continued in the bonus state B, by continuing to light the performance lamp 191, it is possible to make the player understand that a series of advantageous states are present. .

[Configuration regarding transition from advantageous section to non-advantageous section]
Hereinafter, a configuration related to transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section will be explained.

The gaming machine described above has an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section (Fig. 57), and when a predetermined value (number of games or number of acquired coins) that changes as the game progresses in this advantageous section reaches a limiter value, A non-advantageous section is set (transition condition (L) in FIG. 57). In addition, in the advantageous section, the first gaming state (higher AT state) that is advantageous to the player may be set, and this first gaming state (higher AT state) may be set based on the lack of continuation rights (AT remaining number of games, remaining number of sets). The gaming state ends. Furthermore, if the first condition (bonus winning) is satisfied in the first gaming state, a non-advantageous section is set regardless of whether there is a continuation right or whether the limiter value has been reached (transition condition shown in FIG. 57). (G)).

In addition, even if the first condition (bonus winning, transition condition (G) in Figure 57) is the same, there are two cases: one is transferred from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section, and the other is a case of transfer from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. The former corresponds to the case of transitioning from the higher AT state to the higher AT preparation state A, and the latter corresponds to the case of transition from the normal state A to the bonus state A.

In addition, when transitioning from normal state B to bonus state A, even if the first condition (bonus winning, transition condition (G) in Figure 57) is met, the transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section will not occur. The objective is to maintain the advantageous section in which you are staying.

In addition, in the upper AT state and normal AT state, if the first condition (bonus winning) is met, setting or non-setting of the non-advantageous section is determined by referring to the presence or absence of continuation rights and the degree to which the limiter value has been reached. You may also do so.

In the above configuration, in addition to when the predetermined value reaches the limiter value, when the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state, there is a non-advantageous section in which the first gaming state is not set regardless of whether there is a continuation right. Set. That is, the first gaming state may end when the first condition is met, in addition to when the right to continue runs out or when the predetermined value reaches the limiter value. With this configuration, there are many opportunities for the advantage to change due to the end of the first gaming state, and it is possible to make the game more interesting.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the upper AT state corresponds to an example of the first gaming state, but this first gaming state may include, for example, the AT state including the normal AT state explained above, or the normal AT state. As such, any situation that is advantageous to the player that is managed based on the presence or absence of the continuation right is sufficient.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, winning the bonus (BB1, BB2, RB) corresponds to an example of the first condition, but for example, winning the bonus (BB1, BB2, RB) internally corresponds to an example of the first condition. Alternatively, it may be internally winning some winning combination other than the bonus, or winning some other winning combination other than the bonus. Furthermore, the first condition may be that the bonus is won and activated (the bonus state is started), and furthermore, the first condition may be that a predetermined number of coins have been acquired or that a predetermined number of games have been played. May be used as a condition. In this case, the number of acquired coins and the number of games played are not limited to the values in the first gaming state, but may also be values in a period including the first gaming state (for example, the AT state in this embodiment) or in an advantageous section. good. Furthermore, the first condition may be that each of the above conditions is satisfied in a state in which the number of games and the number of acquired coins in an advantageous state are close to (or determined) the limit value. For example, when the first state is a so-called general AT state, there is a predetermined number of AT remaining games or remaining sets, or it is certain that the number of games or the number of acquired coins will reach the limit value. The first condition may be a case in which an effect is executed to notify the user when the user is present (or a case in which the effect is not executed), or the above-mentioned conditions may be combined with this.

In the embodiment described above, the period from the internal bonus winning to the bonus winning is in the AT state (the advantageous period does not end only with the internal bonus winning). With this configuration, the AT state is longer than in the configuration where the advantageous period ends due to bonus internal winning, so the player's dissatisfaction may be alleviated.

In addition, in the gaming machine described above, an advantageous section is set when a second condition (for example, winning the payout combination and winning the transfer lottery) is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (transition condition (see FIG. 57) A)). Then, in the first case where the second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (upper AT preparation state A) set by the first condition being satisfied in the first gaming state (upper AT preparation state B becomes case) is better than the second case (normal state B) in which the second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (normal state A) set due to a reason other than the first condition being satisfied in the first gaming state. (in which case the higher AT preparation state B reliably shifts to the higher AT state and becomes more advantageous than the normal state B).

The above configuration does not necessarily have to be adopted; for example, the advantages may be the same in both the first case and the second case, such as normal state B. However, if the configuration is such that the first case is more advantageous than the second case, even if a non-advantageous section is set due to the establishment of the first condition, the subsequent establishment of the second condition Since this may be advantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the first condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, an example of the second condition is to win internally for a winning role that has a payout and also to win the transfer lottery. It may be winning or winning a prize, or it may be winning a transfer lottery for each game. Further, for example, if the first condition is internal bonus winning, the second condition may be bonus winning.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the case where the upper AT state passes through the upper AT preparation state A and becomes the upper AT preparation state B corresponds to an example of the first case, and the case where the upper AT state passes through the normal state A and becomes the normal state. The case B corresponds to an example of the second case. Regarding the first case and the second case, any configuration is sufficient as long as the first case is more advantageous than the second case. For example, in the first case, the AT state or the CZ state is In the second case, the state becomes normal state B.

Note that, as an example, the second case is a case where the normal state B is entered from the upper AT state through the normal state A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state A may not be the state transferred from the upper AT state, When changing settings, the state changes from normal state A to normal state B, or from normal state A to normal state B due to transition condition (F), or from normal state A to normal state B due to transition condition (L). This may be the case.

Further, the game machine described above may be set to an operation performance game state (AT state) in which the operation performance is executed in an advantageous section, and the first case is better than the second case. It is easier to set the operation performance game state. With this configuration, even if the non-advantageous section is set due to the first condition being met, the operation production game state is likely to be set due to the subsequent second condition being met, so when the first condition is met, This can prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the above-described gaming machine may be set to an operation effect game state (AT state) in which an operation effect is executed in an advantageous section, and the first game state (upper AT state) is the operation effect game state ( AT state). With this configuration, in addition to the operation effects, the player can be entertained by changes caused by the satisfaction of the first condition.

Furthermore, the game machine described above is configured such that an advantageous section is set when the first condition is satisfied in a non-advantageous section. In this configuration, there are cases where an advantageous section is set and a non-advantageous section is set depending on the satisfaction of the first condition. That is, by making the first condition play a different role, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine described above may set a second gaming state (normal state B, CZ state, bonus state A) different from the first gaming state in the advantageous section, and this second gaming state If the first condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is maintained. In this configuration, since the behavior when the first condition is satisfied is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by assigning different roles to the first condition. can.

[About the user's production settings]
In this embodiment, the settings of the effect can be changed by the user. Hereinafter, an example of effect setting by the user will be explained using FIG. 64.

First, FIG. 64(a) shows an example of a screen during a game. The user can display a menu screen for checking information on the gaming machine and adjusting effects by operating a setting button 165 (described later). FIG. 64(b) shows an example of a menu screen for effect settings.

On the menu screen shown in FIG. 64(b), five items can be selected: "Product Adjustment", "Product Selection", "Payout Table", "History", and "End". When the item ``Production Adjustment'' is selected, the process proceeds to the effect adjustment screen (FIG. 64(c)), and when the item ``Production Selection'' is selected, the process proceeds to the effect selection screen (FIG. 64(f)). If you select the "Payout table" item, you can check the winning combinations and their payouts, and if you select the "History" item, you can check the gaming history. Also, by selecting the "Exit" item, you can return to the state before displaying the menu screen.

On the effect adjustment screen shown in FIG. 64(c), items such as "brightness", "volume", and "back" can be selected, and the current status of "brightness" and "volume" can be confirmed. When the item "Brightness" is selected, the screen advances to the brightness adjustment screen (FIG. 64(d)), and when the item "Volume" is selected, the screen advances to the volume adjustment screen (FIG. 64(e)). Furthermore, by selecting the "Return" item, the screen can be returned to the menu screen (FIG. 64). In addition, as in this embodiment, by displaying the "brightness" and "volume" sizes differently on this production adjustment screen and the brightness adjustment screen and volume adjustment screen (described later), it is possible to mistakenly adjust the target. It can be made difficult.

On the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 64(d), the current state of "brightness" can be checked and adjusted. In addition, by selecting the item "Return", it is possible to return to the effect adjustment screen (FIG. 64(c)). Note that when these brightness changes occur, the brightness of the side lamp 144 is changed in accordance with the changed brightness. Further, the brightness of not only the side lamp 144 but also the liquid crystal may be changed.

On the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 64(e), the current state of the "volume" can be checked and adjusted. In addition, by selecting the item "Return", it is possible to return to the effect adjustment screen (FIG. 64(c)). Note that when these volume changes are made, a test sound is output to confirm the changed volume. Note that the structure is not limited to the sound such as the test sound, and may be configured to notify that the change has been made, such as by displaying the change.For other items, the structure may also be configured to notify that the change has been made. It may be provided.

On the production selection screen shown in FIG. 64(f), the following items can be selected: "Custom", "BGM", and "Back". When the "BGM" item is selected, the screen advances to the BGM selection screen (FIG. 64(g)). Note that by selecting the "Custom" item, it is possible to customize presentation contents other than BGM, such as a character that navigates the operation mode during the AT state, the frequency of occurrence of presentation, etc. Furthermore, by selecting the "Return" item, it is possible to return to the menu screen (FIG. 64(b)).

On the BGM selection screen shown in FIG. 64(g), it is possible to check which of "music A", "music B", "music C", and "music D" is set and change it. In addition, by selecting the item "Return", it is possible to return to the effect adjustment screen (FIG. 64(c)).

The above operation uses a setting button 165 provided separately from the operation means for proceeding with the game (not shown in FIG. 49). This setting button 165 is shown in FIG. 64(h). In the following description, the central rectangular button will be referred to as a center button 165C, and the upper, lower, left, and right buttons will be referred to as an upper button 165U, a lower button 165D, a left button 165L, and a right button 165R, respectively. Among these, the center button 165C is used for displaying the menu screen and determining each item, and the other buttons are used for selecting each item and changing the value. The operations performed by these operations are not particularly limited. For example, on the volume adjustment screen, the volume may be changed using the left button 165L and right button 165R, or the volume may be changed using the upper button 165U and lower button 165D, It may also be possible to change the volume of any of these. In addition, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the selected volume is immediately reflected. For example, an item of "decision" is provided, and by selecting this item and operating the center button 165C, the selected volume is reflected. Good too. In this case, the test sound may be output when the volume is selected, or the test sound may be output when the volume is reflected.

Note that such operating means are not limited to the configuration of this embodiment, and may be configured without left and right buttons or up and down buttons, for example. Alternatively, for example, only the center button 165C may be provided, and after the menu screen is displayed by operating the central button 165C, an operation means for proceeding with the game such as a stop button may be used. Alternatively, it may be a touch panel type that imitates such buttons.

The display of the menu screen, etc. explained above may be switched from the game screen, or may be displayed on a part of the game screen, or may be displayed so that the game screen is visible. The transparent display may be superimposed. Further, values such as the number of acquired coins, the total number of acquired coins, and the number of stored coins may be displayed on a menu screen or the like.

Further, if a plurality of display means such as a sub-liquid crystal are provided, any one of them may be used to display a menu screen or the like.

In the above example, each screen other than the menu screen in FIG. 64(b) does not have an item for returning to the game, but an "end" item may be provided similarly to the menu screen in FIG. 64(b). Further, an item may be separately provided that allows immediate return to the menu screen shown in FIG. 64(b). Furthermore, each of the above screens may be displayed in a tree structure so that a desired screen can be displayed immediately. In addition, if any game progress operation (for example, operation of the bet button or start lever) is performed, or if a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the setting button 165 being operated, these displays will be displayed. may be terminated immediately. Furthermore, these displays may be ended immediately upon selection of a specific item such as "Decision" described above.

Further, in the above example, the adjustment screen that allows various adjustments is called up via the menu screen, and the configuration is such that the settings cannot be changed at least in the first operation. Furthermore, since there is an opportunity to check the current setting state before changing the settings, it is possible to perform adjustment work after checking the setting state. An example of such a configuration is a configuration in which the first operation is a recall operation to check the current settings, and the second and subsequent operations can change the settings. On the other hand, the configuration is not limited to this, and the settings may be changed from the first operation. In this case, one call operation can be omitted, which improves the operability and convenience of adjustment work. can. In addition, for example, the volume adjustment screen may be displayed by operating the left button 165L or the right button 165R from a state where the menu screen is not displayed, or the volume may be adjusted immediately. Note that the test sound may be output when the volume is adjusted by the player, regardless of the contents of the display screen at that time. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which only the volume can be adjusted by operating the left button 165L or right button 165R, and in this case, the volume adjustment screen may not be displayed.

Note that this embodiment employs a configuration in which the contents changed on the production menu screen in FIG. 64 are initialized by operating the payment button 134. With this configuration, changes made by the previous player are not carried over to the next player, so it is possible to prevent unintended content from being made when setting the performance by the next player. For example, in the case of a medalless machine, a counting process may be executed to transfer medal information to an external device connected to the gaming machine (clearing the number of medals on the gaming machine side and sending the same number to the external device). The effect settings may be initialized by operating the counting operation means that executes this counting process, and the effect settings may be initialized by operating either the counting operation means or the settlement button 134. It's okay.

If the effect menu screen of FIG. 64 is displayed while the effect sound is being output, there is a possibility that a problem may arise, such as the test sound on the volume adjustment screen becoming difficult to hear. In view of these problems, while the production menu screen or the like is being displayed, the volume of the production sound may be lowered or the production sound may not be output, regardless of the set volume. In addition, with this configuration, by intentionally displaying the production menu screen while the user is away from the seat, the volume can be temporarily lowered without changing the volume setting, thereby preventing bothering those around the user.

[About automatic initialization of production settings (1)]
In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the contents changed on the production menu screen in FIG. 64 are initialized by operating the settlement button 134, but in addition to this case, the contents changed on the production menu screen in FIG. The system employs a configuration that automatically initializes the contents. An example of the operation of this configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed, and FIGS. 66(a) to (g) show the situation at each timing of (a) to (g) shown in FIG. 65. It is a diagram. Note that the timing chart in FIG. 65 starts from the state where the game has ended (all reels are stopped, no number of bets is placed).

First, in the timing of FIG. 65(a) and FIG. 66(a), the credit value is 4 and the volume is set to 3. In addition, a game screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the MAX bet button 132 is lit to indicate that it is ready for operation. Note that the setting button 165 described in FIG. 64(h) is shown at the lower left of FIG. 66(a).

Here, it is assumed that the volume is adjusted using the setting button 165. At the timing of FIG. 65(b) and in FIG. 66(b), the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 64(e) is displayed. Note that the volume adjustment screen here is transparently displayed overlapping a part of the previously displayed game screen. Further, at the timing of FIG. 65(c) and FIG. 66(c), the volume is changed from 3 to 4 on this volume adjustment screen, and at the timing of FIG. 65(d) and FIG. 66(d), the volume is changed to 4. It has been changed from 5 to 5. Further, FIG. 65 shows that the test sound is being output at the timings of (c) and (d), and that this test sound is increasing in accordance with the changed volume.

Thereafter, it is assumed that the MAX bet button 132 is operated, the display of the volume adjustment screen is finished, credits are subtracted and the number of bets is set, and a game start operation is performed. The timing of FIG. 65(e) and FIG. 66(e) show the state during a game. Note that FIG. 65 shows that the bet sound when the MAX bet button 132 is operated and the production sound during the game are output at a changed volume.

The timing of FIG. 65(f) and the state after the end of the game are shown in FIG. 66(f). Here, it is assumed that there is no payout in this game and the credit is 1. In this state, the MAX bet button 132 is turned off, indicating that no operation can be accepted.

Here, when the current user ends the game and leaves the game, if the content of the effect changed by this user remains unchanged, the interest of the game may be reduced if the content is not desirable for the next user. There is a risk of decline. This embodiment is a 3-card betting machine, and if the MAX bet button 132 is in a state where it cannot accept operations, the game cannot be played unless credits are added. When the game ends, that is, when the player leaves the game machine without any intention to continue playing, a configuration (automatic initialization) is adopted in which changed contents are returned to the initial state. In the timing of FIG. 65(g) and FIG. 66(g), the changed volume is returned to the initial state value (3) after 30 seconds have passed since the reels stopped after the game ended. . Note that since the volume change here is not caused by the player's operation, no test sound is output.

The initial state value of the volume at this time may be the value at the time of shipment from the factory, or may be a value set by the store. In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the middle value among the five volume levels is the initial value, but the stages in which the volume can be set are not limited to this example, and the initial value The maximum value may be set as .

In addition, in FIG. 66(g), a message indicating that settings related to the effect can be made using the setting button 165 is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect image display device 157 (hereinafter referred to as effect setting guide). has been done. This performance setting guide may not be displayed, but if the performance setting guide is displayed, the player can be informed that the performance setting is possible. In the example of FIG. 66(g), the words "volume/light intensity settings" are used as the effect setting guide, but for example, the words "menu screen operation" may be used, and the effect settings can be made. It is sufficient if it is a display that indicates that there is. Moreover, by executing this together with a display imitating the setting button 165 as shown in FIG. 66(g), it is possible to make it easier to understand what operation to perform when changing the effect. Further, the display position is not limited to the edge of the screen as shown in FIG. 66(g), but may be displayed in the center of the screen.

Note that the display timing of the production setting guide may be the timing when the volume is initialized as in the example in FIG. It may be displayed.

In FIGS. 65 and 66 above, the operation is explained when the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept operations after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reels stopped, but the MAX bet button 132 can accept operations. In this case, the changed contents are maintained as they are even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the reels stopped. An example of this operation will be described below with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is not executed, and FIGS. 68(a) to (g) are diagrams showing the situation at each timing of (a) to (g) shown in FIG. 67. It is. Note that in explaining the operations in FIGS. 67 and 68, parts that are different from those in FIGS. 65 and 66 will be explained, and descriptions of the same parts as in FIGS. 65 and 66 will be omitted.

First, in the timing of FIG. 67(a) and FIG. 68(a), the credit value is 6, which is different from the examples of FIGS. 65 and 66. From now on, it is assumed that the volume is changed and the game is played in the same manner as in the examples shown in FIGS. 65 and 66. Comparing FIGS. 68(b) to 68(e) with FIGS. 66(b) to 66(e), only the credit values are different. In addition, in the timing of FIG. 65(f) and FIG. 66(f), there are few credits and the MAX bet button 132 is in a state where it cannot accept operation, but in the timing of FIG. 67(f) and FIG. 68(f), It is shown that the MAX bet button 132 is ready for operation. Furthermore, since the MAX bet button 132 is in a state where it can accept operations, automatic initialization is not executed even after 30 seconds have passed since the reels have stopped, and the changed contents are maintained as they are. In the timing of FIG. 67(g) and FIG. 68(g), the changed volume is maintained even after 30 seconds have passed since the reels stopped after the end of the game. Further, in this case, a display in which settings related to presentation can be made using the setting button 165 as shown in FIG. 66(g) is not executed.

According to the configuration described above, it becomes difficult for changes made by the previous player to be carried over to the next player, and it is possible to prevent unintended contents from being made when setting the performance by the next player.

[About automatic initialization of production settings (2)]
In FIGS. 65 to 68, a configuration has been described in which automatic initialization is executed when "the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which no operation can be accepted" and "a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels stopped." The present embodiment is a 3-bet bet machine, and the "state in which the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept operation" is an example for determining the "state in which the game cannot be started." In other words, regardless of the number of bets that can be set on the gaming machine, by configuring the machine to perform automatic initialization when "the game cannot be started" and "a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels have stopped," changes made by the previous player cannot be made. This can make it difficult for the next player to take over.

Here, in determining the "state in which the game cannot be started", the value of credits may be determined, or the state of the bet button (whether it is in an operation acceptance state) may be determined. . If the MAX bet button 132 is an operation means that can set the maximum number of bets that can be set with the current credit, the MAX bet can be made even if the credit is less than 3 (in a state where the game cannot be started) on a 3-bet bet machine. The button 132 becomes ready for operation reception. In such a configuration, the credit value may be determined.

Further, there are a plurality of bet numbers with which a game can be started, and if a certain bet number among them cannot be set, a "state in which a game cannot be started with a certain bet number" occurs. Some game machines recommend playing a game with a certain number of bets, and in this case, the above state can be regarded as the same as "a state in which the game cannot be started." In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a ``state in which a game cannot be started with a certain number of bets'' is determined in the same manner as ``a state in which a game cannot be started'' and automatic initialization is executed. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which automatic initialization is executed when "a game cannot be started with a certain number of bets" and "a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels stopped." For example, on a game machine that allows 3-card bet games and 2-card bet games, the advantage to the player is lower in 2-bet games than in 3-bet bet games (AT lottery is treated poorly, the winning probability of the winning combination is lower, If the number of bets recommended for playing the game is 3 (low, etc.), the credit will be automatically initialized if the number of bets recommended is less than 3 (less than the recommended number of bets, "certain number of bets" is 3). You can do it like this.

Note that depending on the gaming machine, the number of bets that can be made to start the game may differ depending on the gaming state, but in this case as well, the above-mentioned "state where the game cannot be started" and "state where the game cannot be started with a certain number of bets" are applicable. Both of these can be said to be ``a state in which there is a certain number of bets that cannot be set due to insufficient credit among the number of bets that can be started.'' In this case, a certain number of bets to be determined for automatic initialization may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state. By determining this state and implementing automatic initialization, it is possible to prevent changes made by the previous player from being carried over to the next player. Note that this determination may be made by determining the value of credits or by determining the state of the bet button. Note that the certain number of bets to be determined here may be the maximum value of the number of bets that can be started, or may be the minimum value of the number of bets that can be started. , or the entire number of bets that can be made to start playing the game. For example, if there is a game machine that allows you to start playing with all the bet numbers of 1, 2, and 3, the maximum number of bets will be "3" and the minimum number of bets will be "1". Become. Furthermore, if the game machine is capable of starting a game with a 2-piece bet and a 3-piece bet (with two types of bet numbers), the maximum value of the number of bets will be "3" and the minimum value of the number of bets will be "2".

[About automatic initialization of production settings (3)]
In FIGS. 65 to 68, a configuration has been described in which automatic initialization is executed when "the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which no operation can be accepted" and "a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels stopped." This "predetermined time elapsed after the reels stopped" is an example for determining the elapse of time after the end of the game, such as "predetermined time elapsed after the game result was determined" or "predetermined time elapsed without player operation." ” may be configured. In addition, if the player performs any operation while measuring the elapsed time, the measurement results up to that point will be reset, and from there, ``a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any player operation.'' A configuration may also be adopted in which the determination is made and automatic initialization is executed. Note that the means for executing automatic initialization and the means for measuring the passage of time (timekeeping means) may be the same means. For example, the main control unit 300 measures the passage of time, and the first sub-control unit In step 400, automatic initialization is executed based on this result. For example, the means for executing automatic initialization and the means for measuring the passage of time may be different means.

For example, depending on the display time of the screen related to the effect setting explained in FIG. 64, the above-mentioned predetermined time may elapse while the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 64(e) is displayed. In such a case, automatic initialization may be executed and the volume after initialization may be displayed. Note that with this configuration, if the volume changes while the player is away from the screen, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that something illegal is being done. If there is such a concern, this may not be reflected in the volume displayed while automatic initialization is being performed, and the volume before initialization may continue to be displayed. An example of the operation when this configuration is adopted will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a timing chart when automatic initialization is executed while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the situation at each timing of (h). Note that in explaining the operations in FIGS. 69 and 70, parts that are different from those in FIGS. 65 and 66 will be explained, and descriptions of the same parts as in FIGS. 65 and 66 will be omitted.

First, the timings in FIGS. 69(a) to (e) and FIGS. 70(a) to (e) are the same as the timings in FIGS. 65(a) to (e) and the examples in FIGS. 66(a) to (e), respectively. It is. The example of FIG. 69 differs from that of FIG. 65 in that the volume adjustment screen of FIG. 64(e) is displayed after the reels have stopped. Although the volume adjustment screen is not displayed at the timing of FIG. 65(f) and FIG. 66(f), the volume adjustment screen is displayed at the timing of FIG. 69(f) and FIG. 70(f). It has been shown that Furthermore, FIG. 17 shows that although the volume is changed by automatic initialization while this volume adjustment screen is displayed, the contents of this volume adjustment screen are displayed as they were before initialization. There is.

The timing of FIG. 69(g) and FIG. 70(g) show that the game screen is displayed after the volume adjustment screen ends over time. This state is similar to that shown in FIG. 66(g). Furthermore, when a new volume adjustment screen is displayed from this state, the current volume value (initialized value) is displayed. The timing of FIG. 69(h) and FIG. 70(h) show that the volume adjustment screen is displayed and the current volume value (initialized value) is displayed.

[About automatic initialization of production settings (4)]
FIG. 71(a) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the number of bets has been set but is insufficient to start the game. In this example, it is assumed that the MAX bet button 132 is an operation means that can set the maximum number of bets that can be set with the current credit.

In FIG. 71(a), it is assumed that the credit value is 2, the volume is set to 5, and all the reels are stopped. When the MAX bet button 132 is operated in this state, 2, which is the maximum number of bets that can be set with the current credit, is set, but the game cannot be started on the 3-bet bet machine. It is assumed that after the MAX bet button 132 is operated, a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any operation. At this time, "a state in which there is a certain number of bets (3 in this example) that cannot be set due to insufficient credit among the number of bets that can be started" is changed to "a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any player operation". Become. In the explanation so far, we have explained that automatic initialization is executed when such a state occurs.

However, if the number of bets other than 0 is set (in a bet state), it is assumed that the player intends to continue playing the game, and the automatic initialization may not be executed. In FIG. 71(a), it is shown that the volume setting is maintained without being initialized because the number of bets is set. In addition, in the example of FIG. 71(a), the case where the number of bets is set by operating the MAX bet button 132 has been explained, but automatic initialization is not executed even if there is a bet made by other bet buttons or by care. It may also be a configuration.

FIG. 71(b) is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when the payment button 134 is operated while "a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels stopped" during automatic initialization. As explained above, when the payment button 134 is operated, the effect settings including the volume are initialized. Therefore, for example, if the settlement button 134 is operated while counting "the elapse of a predetermined period of time since the reels stopped" during automatic initialization, this timing will end and no new timing will be executed. However, for example, if the checkout button 134 is operated while the "predetermined time has elapsed since the reels stopped" during automatic initialization, a new predetermined time has elapsed without initializing the production settings. It may also be possible to perform time measurement for this purpose. In FIG. 71(b), the settlement button 134 is operated while the MAX bet button 132 is in a state where it is unable to accept operations and is counting the “predetermined time elapsed since the reels stopped,” and a new predetermined time elapses from there. It is shown that the time has been counted and automatic initialization has been executed (here, the volume is set to the initial value of 3).

Note that the automatic initialization process described above may be any process as long as it can realize the above operation. For example, it may be determined that a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation, and then the acceptance state of the MAX bet button 132 is determined. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which, after determining the acceptance state of the MAX bet button 132, it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any operation. Further, regarding the operation of the settlement button 134, for example, processing may be performed such that when the settlement button 134 is operated while a timer is used to measure the passage of a predetermined time, this time measurement is ended. Furthermore, in the case of the operation shown in FIG. 71(b), the timer value may be initialized when the payment button 134 is operated.

[About automatic initialization of production settings (5)]
In FIGS. 65 to 68, a configuration has been described in which automatic initialization is executed when "the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which no operation can be accepted" and "a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels stopped." In this example, all of the performance contents are initialized at once. However, for example, when the MAX bet button 132 is in a state where it cannot accept operations, the brightness is set to "the first time elapsed since the reels stopped," and the volume is set to "the second time elapsed from the reels stopped." It is also possible to have a configuration in which the timing of automatic initialization is different for each type of setting target when performing automatic initialization, such as executing automatic initialization for each type of setting target. At this time, whether or not to perform automatic initialization is determined based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time, and the execution timing of subsequent automatic initialization is then varied (for example, for brightness, automatic initialization is performed immediately, and volume For example, the predetermined time period for whether or not to perform automatic initialization may be set differently depending on the type of setting target (for example, for brightness, automatic initialization may be performed after 5 seconds). It may be determined whether or not automatic initialization can be executed when 30 seconds have elapsed since the reels have stopped, and whether or not automatic initialization has been executed may be determined when 40 seconds have elapsed since the reels have stopped with respect to the volume.

Further, for example, there are cases where it is preferable that the volume is higher than the initial state, so depending on the setting value, it may be possible to prevent early initialization. From this point of view, for example, the ``predetermined time'' of ``the state in which the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept operations'' and ``the predetermined time elapsed since the reels stopped'' may be changed depending on the settings. The timing of automatic initialization may be changed depending on the configuration.

FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration in which the timing of automatic initialization is varied depending on the set volume. In this example, a recommended value for the volume setting (volume 3 in FIG. 72) is determined, and a "predetermined time" of "the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept operation" and "a predetermined time has elapsed since the reels stopped" is determined. is configured such that the value is larger when the volume is set higher than the recommended value than when the volume is set lower than the recommended value.

In the example of FIG. 72(a), in a state where "the MAX bet button 132 cannot accept any operation" and "the reels are stopped", the volume is automatically initialized from the state where it is set to 1 to the initial value of the volume ( In this example, the initial value of the volume is set by automatic initialization from the state where the volume is set to 4, which takes longer than the time it takes for 5) to be set (in the case of arrow (a1) in Fig. 72(a)). 72(a) (in the case of arrow (a2) in FIG. 72(a)) is longer, and the state in which the volume is set higher than the recommended value is more likely to be maintained.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 72(b), when the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which operation cannot be accepted and the reels are stopped, the volume is initialized by automatic initialization from the state where the volume is set to 1. It takes longer than the time it takes for the value (in this example, 3) to be set (in the case of arrow (b1) in Figure 72(b)), the initial value of the volume is changed by automatic initialization from the state where the volume is set to 5. The time it takes to set the volume (in the case of arrow (b2) in FIG. 72(b)) is longer, making it easier to maintain a state in which the volume is set higher than the recommended value.

Note that in FIG. 72(a), a recommended value is provided separately from the initial value, but the initial value and the recommended value may be the same as in FIG. 72(b).

Further, depending on the settings, there may be cases in which the device is not automatically initialized, for example, if the volume is higher than the recommended value, the device is not automatically initialized.

[About demo display]
This embodiment employs a configuration in which a demonstration screen (demonstration display) is executed to liven up the atmosphere in the store when no games are being played. The demo screen is a series of production images, a production using characters, and a model introduction and model name. This is a video of about 90 seconds (hereinafter also referred to as demo image execution time). This demo screen is displayed after all the reels have stopped and the operation for starting the next game (operation of the bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the start lever 135 when winning a replay prize) is enabled, and the demonstration standby time is displayed. (for example, 40 seconds), but if the display of the demo screen is restricted, the demo screen is not displayed.

In FIG. 73, in the normal state B in which the display of the demo screen is allowed, after all the reels have stopped, the operation to start the next game (operation of bet buttons 130 to 132, operation of the start lever 135 when winning a replay prize) is performed. An example is shown in which the demo screen is displayed because the demo standby time has elapsed while the operation (operation) was enabled. When displaying this demo screen, the game screen (for example, timing (a)) switches to the demo screen (for example, timing (b)), and then, upon receiving the game start operation, the demo screen switches again to the game screen. (For example, timing (c)). The lower part of FIG. After the demo screen is finished, the game screen before the demo screen is executed will be displayed.In addition, in FIG. 73, the game screen is displayed after receiving the operation to start the next game. The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the game screen is displayed after the demo screen execution time has elapsed, the demo screen may be displayed again after the demo screen execution time has elapsed, or the game screen may be displayed once after the demo screen execution time has elapsed. may be displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then the demo screen may be displayed again.

In addition, in FIG. 74, as in FIG. 73, although the time equivalent to the demo standby time has elapsed with all the reels stopped, it is in the AT state where the display of the demo screen is restricted. An example is shown in which the demo screen is not displayed. Of the states shown in Fig. 57, the display of the demo screen is basically allowed in normal state A and normal state B, but when performing special effects such as continuous effects or AT confirmed effects, The display of the demo screen is restricted. Further, in game states other than normal state A and normal state B, display of the demonstration screen is restricted.

Note that the control method for displaying (or regulating) the demonstration screen is not limited. For example, if the demo screen is allowed, the main control unit 300 sends a command to the first sub-control unit 400 to display the demo screen, and if the demo screen is restricted, the main control unit 300 sends a command to the first sub-control unit 400 to display the demo screen. The command for instructing display may not be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Further, the main control unit 300 uniformly transmits a command instructing the display of the demo screen, and the first sub-control unit 400 displays the demo screen depending on whether or not the demo screen is regulated. It's okay. Furthermore, display of the demo screen is permitted by sending a specific command from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the operation to start the next game is ready. It may be in a state where Further, in the normal state, the specific command is sent, but in the AT state, the specific command may not be sent, thereby restricting the transition to the demo screen.

Note that in the above example, the elapsed demo standby time is determined by measuring the time since the operation to start the next game became effective, but regarding this timing period (or start time) It may be a period (time) in which all the reels are stopped. For example, the elapse of the demonstration standby time may be determined by measuring the time since all the reels have stopped.

Furthermore, the demo screen may be displayed in response to the operation of the settlement button 134, independently of the elapse of the demonstration standby time, or the operation of the settlement button 134 and the display of the demo screen may be made unrelated. Good too.

[About the game state end display and demo display (1)]
For example, when transitioning from the AT state to the normal state A (FIG. 57(f)), assume that a result screen is displayed at the end of the AT state. With this transition, the display of the demo screen will change from a restricted state to a permitted state, but if the player ends the game without starting the next game with the result screen displayed (player If the user leaves the game machine without intending to continue playing, and the display restriction on the demo screen is not lifted, the demo screen will not be displayed, making it impossible to liven up the atmosphere in the store. In view of this, the present embodiment employs a configuration that allows the demonstration screen to be displayed after the result screen is displayed until the next game is started. This configuration will be explained below using FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when transitioning from the AT state to the normal state A, and FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the state of the slot machine 100 in the timing chart of FIG. 75.

In FIG. 75, in the last game in the AT state, all reels stop and a result screen is displayed, and it is shown that setting suggestions and alerts are also executed on this result screen (FIG. 75(a) ), Figure 76(a)). In the example of FIG. 76(a), the number of games played in the AT state and the number of medals acquired are displayed on the result screen. Additionally, in the lower right corner of the display area of the effect image display device 157, a star mark indicating the setting value (corresponding to an example of setting suggestion) is displayed, and the words ``Be careful not to get carried away'' (as an example of a warning) are displayed. equivalent) is displayed. Among these, the warning is displayed until a specified time has elapsed from the stop of the reels, and is then cleared (FIGS. 75(b) and 76(b)).

In this embodiment, the result screen, setting suggestions, Ensures sufficient time for warnings to be displayed. In FIG. 75, it is shown that the operation for starting the next game is enabled with the result screen and setting suggestion displayed after the predetermined time for alerting has elapsed. By arranging a configuration that ensures the time during which the result screen, setting suggestions, and attention calls are reliably displayed as in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking these screens. Note that the demo screen may be configured to be displayed after the alert ends, for example by lengthening the demo standby time without delaying the time until the operation to start the next game becomes effective. It's okay. Note that the above configuration corresponds to an example in which a demonstration screen is displayed after the attention is finished.

When the operation for starting the next game becomes valid, the display restriction on the demo screen is lifted. In this state, when the demonstration standby time elapses without any operation by the player, the result screen is switched to the demo screen (FIGS. 75(c) and 76(c)). Further, when the game start operation is performed, the reels start rotating and the demo screen is switched to the game screen (FIGS. 75(d) and 76(d)). Note that if the game start operation is performed before the demonstration standby time has elapsed, the result screen is switched to the game screen (FIGS. 75(d) and 76(d)).

Note that in the above configuration, if the start operation is not performed while the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen will be displayed again after the demo screen execution time has elapsed, but this configuration is limited. First, the game screen may be displayed after the demonstration screen execution time has elapsed. In addition, in any of these configurations, when switching from the result screen to the demo screen, the demo screen will be displayed when the demo screen ends (ending pattern depending on the start operation, ending pattern depending on the demo screen execution time). The previous result screen is not displayed, and a screen different from the result screen (game screen or demo screen) is displayed. In this way, after the result screen is displayed, by preventing the result screen from being displayed again after the demonstration screen is displayed, it is possible to prevent surrounding players from losing their desire to play.

In the example above, you can prevent the results screen from remaining displayed. Note that the "result screen" may be any other display as long as it is a display when the AT state ends (hereinafter referred to as an end display). Further, the display is not limited to the one that is displayed after all the reels have stopped, but may be displayed from the start of the final game in the AT state, for example. It should be noted that the setting suggestion and warning may be started at the same timing as the end display, or may be started at a different timing. Furthermore, it is not limited to the configuration of the end display in the "AT state" as in the above example, but may also be applicable to the end display in "states where the demo screen is restricted" such as the bonus state or the CZ state. good. In other words, the above configuration applies not only to "the state in which the result screen is displayed in the AT state" but also to "the state in which the demo screen is regulated and the end display is performed at the end of the gaming state". may be applied. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the end display from remaining executed.

Note that the demo screen may be displayed based on the fact that the payment button 134 is operated during execution of this end display. In addition, for example, in the case of a medalless machine, a counting process may be executed to transfer medal information to an external device connected to the gaming machine (clearing the number of medals on the gaming machine side and sending the same number to the external device). , a demonstration screen may be displayed based on the operation of the counting operation means that executes this counting process. When employing these configurations, the condition may be that display of a demonstration screen is permitted. Furthermore, the end display may be maintained even if the payment button 134 or the counting operation means is operated while the end display is being executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation for starting the next game is effective for both the demonstration waiting time when displaying the demo screen from the end screen and the demonstration waiting time in other situations (for example, FIG. 73). The judgment is made using the time since the As in this configuration, the same time may be used to make the determination both when displaying the demo screen from the end screen and when displaying the demo screen from a location other than the end screen, or different times may be used for each. The determination may be made by The measurement period (or start time) of the demo standby time may be any period (period) when all the reels are stopped. For example, the time period after all the reels stop is measured and the demo standby time is measured. It may also be used to determine the passage of time.

Note that in this embodiment, the result screen is displayed and the alert is displayed, but the end screen and the alert may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. In addition, regarding the mode of displaying/hiding the alert, it can be displayed or hidden in any of the following modes: ``Direct floating → Direct disappearing'', ``Fade in → Fade out'', ``Direct floating → Fade out'', ``Fade in → Direct disappearing''. It's okay to be. Further, in this embodiment, the alert is displayed in front of the result screen in an overlapping manner, but it may be displayed embedded in a part of the end screen.

[About the game state end display and demo display (2)]
In the example of FIG. 75, there are four periods with different situations from when all the reels stop in the AT state until when the gaming state shifts to the normal state A and all the reels start rotating. Specifically, there is a period (period (T1) shown in FIG. 75) in which the result screen, setting suggestions, and attention are executed, and a period in which the attention is finished while the result screen and setting suggestions are executed, and the next game is not completed. There is a period (period (T2) shown in FIG. 75) in which the start operation is not valid, and the alert is finished while the result screen and setting suggestions are being executed, and the start operation for the next game is valid. There is a period in which the demo screen is displayed (period (T3) shown in FIG. 75) and a period in which the demo screen is displayed (period (T4) shown in FIG. 75).

In each of these periods, if an error or power outage occurs and the device recovers from it, the state before recovery may be displayed. Furthermore, regardless of the state before recovery, a result screen or the like may be displayed, or a demo screen may be displayed. In addition, if the timing of the error or power outage is before the end of the warning, the result screen will be displayed when returning, and if it is after the end of the warning, a demo screen will be displayed when returning. The screen at the time of return may be changed depending on the timing at which the error occurred. Furthermore, during the period when the start operation for the next game is valid, the bet operation may or may not be performed, and in these cases, the screen at the time of return may be the same or different. For example, during periods (T3) and (T4), if a bet has been placed, a result screen or the like may be displayed on the screen after return, or a demo screen may be displayed. Further, during the periods (T3) and (T4), if no bet is placed, a result screen or the like may be displayed on the screen after returning, or a demo screen may be displayed. Furthermore, the state after recovery for each period may be the same or may be different. Furthermore, the state after recovery may be the same or different depending on whether the device recovers from an error or from a power outage.

In the example of FIG. 75, the AT state is an advantageous section and the normal state A is a non-advantageous section (see FIG. 57); however, the above configuration is not limited to such an advantageous section; As long as the display on the screen changes from a restricted state to a permitted state, it can be applied even if both states are in an advantageous section (or a non-advantageous section).

Furthermore, if the menu screen explained in FIG. 64 is displayed during each of the above periods and left unattended, the menu screen may be ended after a predetermined period of time and the state before the menu screen was displayed may be displayed. good. Furthermore, regardless of the state before the menu screen is displayed, the menu screen may be ended after a predetermined period of time has elapsed and a results screen or the like may be displayed, or a demo screen may be displayed. Furthermore, the state after the menu screen ends for each period may be the same or may be different.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing at which the demo screen is displayed and the timing at which the initialization of the effect settings described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68 are executed are made to coincide. For example, when the demo screen is displayed with the message "The demo standby time has elapsed since the operation to start the next game became effective", if the MAX bet button 132 is in a state in which no operation can be accepted, and the "Next game The configuration may be such that automatic initialization is performed when the demonstration standby time has elapsed since the operation to start the demo was enabled. In addition, in the case of a configuration in which the demo screen is displayed in response to the operation of the settlement button 134 (or counting operation means), in addition to the elapse of the demonstration standby time, when the settlement button 134 (or the counting operation means) is operated. A configuration may also be adopted in which the effect settings are initialized when the situation arises.

≪Others≫
In this embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of a game machine, but the invention is not limited to this, and game balls (for example, pachinko balls) are used as game media. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arranged ball game machines, Jankyu ball game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

Note that a slot machine is a slot machine that operates on a mobile terminal (smartphone, game console) or computer by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and that only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals, and the game medium is input by inputting the computerized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, it is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , those involving such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

≪Correspondence between the structure of the invention and the embodiments≫
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention described in the above description will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation,
A gaming value storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores the gaming value that can be used for the number of bets;
A bet number operation means (for example, bet buttons 130 to 132) for setting a bet number;
a bet number setting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of setting a value subtracted from the gaming value as a bet number based on the operation of the bet number operating means;
A game machine comprising a performance setting means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400) that can change the settings of the performance by a player's operation,
The number of bets setting means is a means that can set a predetermined value (for example, the number of bets that can start a game) as the number of bets based on the operation of the number of bets operating means,
In a first case where the predetermined value is not included within a range equal to or less than the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage unit, the effect setting means may set the effect setting means to set the effect without any operation by the player, It is a means that can return the settings of the performance to the original state where they have not been changed (Fig. 65, [About automatic initialization of performance settings (1)], [About automatic initialization of performance settings (2)]) reference),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
In a second case where the predetermined value is included in a range equal to or less than the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means, the performance setting means changes the performance setting. It is a means for maintaining the changed state (see Fig. 67, [About automatic initialization of production settings (1)], [About automatic initialization of production settings (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined value includes the minimum value of the number of bets that can be set (see [About automatic initialization of production settings (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The predetermined value includes the maximum value of the number of bets that can be set (see [About automatic initialization of production settings (2)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A clock unit (for example, main control unit 300, first sub-control unit 400) that measures the time during which the predetermined value is not included in the range below the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage unit. ,
The effect setting means is a means capable of returning to the original state based on the measurement result by the timer (see [Regarding automatic initialization of effect settings (3)]);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
If the time measuring means is operated by the player while measuring the time during which the predetermined value is not included in the range below the gaming value stored in the gaming value storage means, , is a means of re-measurement (see [About automatic initialization of production settings (3)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with specific operation means (for example, payment button 134, counting operation means),
The gaming value storage means is a means for clearing the gaming value stored by operating the specific operating means,
The effect setting means is a means capable of returning to the original state based on the operation of the specific operation means (see [Regarding effect settings by the user]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
comprising a notification means (for example, speakers 272, 277) capable of issuing a notification (for example, a test sound) corresponding to the setting when the setting of the production is changed by a player's operation;
The notification means is a means that does not execute the notification if the original state is returned to the original state without any operation by the player. The test sound is not output because the volume is not changed by the player's operation."
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven;
a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
stop control means (for example, main control unit 300) that stops each of the plurality of rotationally driven reels based on acceptance of a stop operation by the stop button;
a gaming state setting means (e.g., main control unit 300) capable of setting a predetermined gaming state (e.g., AT state) advantageous to the player;
Display means capable of performing multiple displays (for example, effect image display device 157);
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays an end display (e.g., a result screen) upon the end of the predetermined gaming state until before a game in a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state (e.g., normal state A) starts. is a viable means,
The display means is a means that can execute a demonstration display based on the fact that no operation related to the game is performed (FIG. 73),
The display means is means that does not execute the demonstration display in the predetermined gaming state (FIG. 74);
The display means may switch from the end display to the demo display when the end display is being executed and all the plurality of reels are stopped (FIG. 75, [End display of gaming state] Regarding the demo display (see (1))),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means may execute the demo display in a state where the end display is being executed and the player has not operated after all the plurality of reels have stopped (FIG. 75, [Game Regarding status end display and demo display (see (1)]),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming state setting means is a means capable of setting a normal gaming state (for example, normal state A, normal state B) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The display means is a means capable of executing the demonstration display when all of the plurality of reels are stopped in the normal gaming state (FIG. 73);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
When the demonstration display is executed in the normal gaming state, the display means is a means for displaying the display contents before the execution of the demonstration display after the demonstration display ends (FIG. 73);
The display means is a means for executing a display different from the end display after the end of the demo display when the demo display is executed while the end display is being executed (FIG. 76);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display content of the demo display executed in the normal gaming state is the same as the display content of the demo display executed while the end display is being executed (FIGS. 73, 76,
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of executing an addiction prevention display (for example, a warning) to urge caution against becoming addicted to the game while the end display is being executed;
The display means is means for not executing the demo display while the immersion prevention display is being executed (FIGS. 75 and 76);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the gaming machine described above has different advantages depending on the setting value,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a setting suggestion display suggesting the setting value (for example, a star mark in FIGS. 76(a) and 76(b)) during execution of the end display,
The display means is means for not executing the demo display while the setting suggestion display is being executed (FIGS. 75 and 76);
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The display means is a means capable of executing the immersion prevention display and the setting suggestion display while the end display is being executed;
The execution time of the setting suggestion display is longer than the execution time of the immersion prevention display ((FIG. 75, FIG. 76),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
A gaming value storage means (for example, RAM 308) that stores the gaming value that can be used for the number of bets;
A specific operation means (for example, a settlement button 134, a counting operation means) for clearing the gaming value,
The display means may switch from the end display to the demo display regardless of the operation of the specific operating means when the end display is being executed and all the plurality of reels are stopped. There is ((Figure 75),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Also, in the above explanation,
Section setting means (for example, main control unit 300) that sets an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section;
a gaming state setting means (for example, the main control unit 300) capable of setting a first gaming state (for example, the upper AT state in FIG. 57) that is advantageous to the player in the advantageous section;
A game machine comprising:
The section setting means is means for setting the non-advantageous section based on the fact that a predetermined value that changes as the game progresses reaches a limiter value in the advantageous section (for example, according to the transition condition ( L)),
The gaming state setting means is a means for terminating the first gaming state based on the fact that the right to continue the first gaming state (for example, the number of AT remaining games) is exhausted (for example, the transition in FIG. 57). Condition (F)),
When a first condition (for example, bonus winning) is satisfied in the first gaming state, the section setting means sets the non-advantageous section regardless of whether the continuation right exists or whether the limiter value is reached. (for example, transition condition (G) in FIG. 57),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when a second condition (for example, winning the payout combination and winning the transfer lottery) is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (for example, 57 transition conditions (A)),
In the first case, where the second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section that is set by the first condition being satisfied in the first gaming state, the first condition is satisfied in the first gaming state. The player is more advantageous than the second case where the second condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section set due to a condition other than that the first condition is satisfied ([Regarding the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section] ``In the case where the structure is configured so that the first case is more advantageous than the second case''),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a performance means (for example, a performance image display device 157) capable of performing an operation performance related to an operation advantageous to the player,
The game state setting means is a means capable of setting an operation performance game state (for example, the AT state in FIG. 57) in which the operation performance is executed in the advantageous section,
In the first case, the operation effect gaming state is more likely to be set than in the second case. "The operation effect game state is easier to set than in the second case"),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
Equipped with a performance means (for example, a performance image display device 157) capable of performing an operation performance related to an operation advantageous to the player,
The game state setting means is a means capable of setting an operation performance game state (for example, the AT state in FIG. 57) in which the operation performance is executed in the advantageous section,
The operation performance game state includes the first game state (in FIG. 57, the AT state includes the upper AT state),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The section setting means is means for setting the advantageous section when the first condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (if the transition condition (G) in FIG. 57 is satisfied in the non-advantageous section, the section is set as an advantageous section. ),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

Further, the game machine described above,
The gaming state setting means is a means capable of setting a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (for example, normal state B, CZ state, normal AT state in FIG. 57) in the advantageous section,
The section setting means is means for maintaining the advantageous section when the first condition is satisfied in the second gaming state (transition in normal state B, CZ state, and normal AT state in FIG. 57). If condition (G) is met, the advantageous section is maintained),
A game machine characterized by the following has been described.

[Fourth embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 77 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 (housing) and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. (door body).

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored inside the center of the main body 101 (see FIG. 83). It is configured to rotate. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three vertical directions from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, making a total of nine symbols visible. There is.

By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light part and the light receiving part. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, he has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery, or that he is playing a bonus game (in a special gaming state). It's a lamp. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals that will be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a press order effect. In this example, the stored coin count display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout coin count display 127 are configured with 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop operation. operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or press order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) left → center → right operation order (left center right or LCR), (2) left → right → center operation order (left center center or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order ( (center left/right or CLR), (4) center → right → left operation order (center right left or CRL), (5) right → left → center operation order (right left center or RLC), (6) right → center → left There are six types of operation orders (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 180 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160.

This presentation device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (hereinafter referred to as When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (when the player It has a structure that appears on the side).

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. 78 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view showing various members disposed inside the main body 101.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate (left side plate) 262, a right side plate (right side plate) 263, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening on the front side. In a predetermined area (second area SE, see FIG. 81) on the inner wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101, there is a main control board storage case 210 (board case) that stores the main control board 210a (board, see FIG. 79) inside. ) is arranged, and below this main control board storage case 210, three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 262, there is provided a sub control board storage case 220 that houses a sub control board 220a (see FIG. 79) therein.

Note that the area where the main control board storage case 210 is placed (second area SE) is not limited to this example, and may be the area where the voltage display sticker 294 (described later) is placed (first area FE; see FIG. 83). , it is sufficient that at least a part of the area does not overlap (does not overlap) in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). It may be a region, or it may be a region on the top plate 261, the left side plate 262, or the right side plate 263.

Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the inner wall of the right side plate 263, which is connected to the main control board 210a and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an external cable connection portion for connecting an external cable (not shown) extending from an information input circuit 652 (see FIG. 80) provided in a hall computer (not shown) or the like. The external cable is inserted into the main body 101 through a cable hole 292 (see FIG. 81) formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101, and is connected to the external cable connection part of the external centralized terminal board 248.

A medal dispensing device 180 (device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the inner wall of the bottom plate 264, and a medal auxiliary storage 240 is disposed on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180. An overflow terminal is provided at the back (not shown).

Further, a power supply box 252 having a power supply board is disposed on the left side of the medal dispensing device 180 when viewed from the front, and a power switch 244 is disposed in front of the power supply box 252. The power supply box 252 converts the AC power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as a main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. do. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

According to this example, the power switch 244 cannot be operated unless the front door 102 is opened, so even if you accidentally connect to an outlet with a different power supply, the power will be turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet. can be prevented.

This power supply box 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 (see FIG. 81) is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here is connected to a power cord hole 265 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. (See FIGS. 79 and 81) and extends to the outside.

The front door 102 is a door body that is hinged to the left side plate 262 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in the closed state, can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 77). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change it from the closed state to the open state), but anyone other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

According to this example, since a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102, a person other than the administrator may connect the power outlet to an outlet with a different power supply and immediately turn on the power. This can be prevented.

At the top of the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79, a hole 295 for a medal replenishing machine through which a replenishing nozzle of a medal replenishing machine (not shown) can be inserted is formed approximately in the center of the back plate 242. A plate-shaped medal replenishing machine lid 296 is removably attached to the replenishing machine hole 295. Note that a member indicated by the reference numeral 298 in FIG. 79 is a grip portion (handle) attached to the left side plate 262 and the right side plate 263.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 80. Note that FIG. 80 shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. A ROM 306 for storing position, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random value generation circuit 316 (this circuit has two built-in random value generation circuits) that derives a value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315a. ) and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Start game control (start main control section main processing described later).

Random value generation circuit 316 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. There are two types of methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random value seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number value. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random numerical value. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the obtained value as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use

The main control unit 300 is also equipped with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and an optical system for the reel 110. sensor, optical sensor of the reel 111, optical sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and are used to insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation when The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of reel 110, the optical sensor of reel 111, and the optical sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 334. Gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply box 252 to the main control unit 300. If the voltage is less than the voltage (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. , this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. has been done.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 that can detect the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a press operation of the production button 156. is connected to a production button sensor 430 that can detect. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the production device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Body>
Next, the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIGS. 81 and 82. Note that FIG. 81 is a rear view showing an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294, and FIG. 82 is a rear view showing an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294, with various dimensions noted.
Here, in the rear view shown in FIG. 82, the symbol w indicates the width of the main body 101, and the symbol h indicates the height of the main body 101. In addition, in the figure, a dotted line marked with the symbol M1 indicates the center (center) in the width direction of the main body 101, and a dotted line marked with the symbol M2 indicates the center (center) in the height direction of the main body 101. . Note that in the subsequent drawings, in order to give priority to the ease of viewing the drawings, descriptions of the symbols M1 and M2 may be omitted and only the corresponding dotted lines are illustrated.
In addition, in the following description of the rear view, for convenience of explanation, the right side and right end of the slot machine 100 when viewed from the rear (left side and left end when viewed from the front) are simply referred to as "right side" and "right end", and the rear view of the slot machine 100 is The left side and the left end when viewed from the front (the right side and the right end when viewed from the front) are simply referred to as the "left side" and the "left end."

As shown in FIG. 81, the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 is roughly divided into three regions: an upper region 242a located above, a central region 242b located in the center, and a lower region 242c located below. can do.

In the upper region 242a of the outer wall of the back plate 242, there are a first ventilation hole 281 for ventilation of the main body 101, a screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210, and an external centralized terminal board 248 (Fig. A cable hole 292 is formed for passing an external cable connected to the cable (see 78). Note that the cable hole 292 also functions as a ventilation hole for ventilating the main body 101.

<Back/upper area>
As shown in FIG. 82, the first ventilation hole 281 is a vertically elongated elliptical hole with a vertical width x and a horizontal width y (x>y), and has the same shape as a fourth ventilation hole 284 described later. In this example, in the upper region 242a of the outer wall of the back plate 242, the first ventilation holes 281 are arranged in two regions: an upper region and a lower region.

In the upper region, a predetermined number (19 in this example) of first ventilation holes 281 are formed at approximately equal intervals from the right end to the left end of the back plate 242, while in the lower region, the main body 101 In the vicinity of the right and left ends of the outer wall of the back plate 242, so that the main control board storage case 210 housed inside the main control board storage case 210 and the main body 101 do not overlap in the thickness direction (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). A predetermined number (four in this example) of first ventilation holes 281 are formed at approximately equal intervals.
According to this example, since the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the first ventilation hole 281 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the main body 101, the main control board can be stored through the first ventilation hole 281. Acts such as accessing the back side of the case 210 can be prevented, and unauthorized acts on the main control board 210a can be prevented, thereby improving the security of the gaming machine.

The screw hole 290 is composed of an insertion hole through which a screw (not shown) can be inserted, and a pedestal consisting of an annular recess placed outside the insertion hole, and the screw hole 290 has an annular shape with a diameter smaller than that of the cable hole 292 as a whole. This is the part of the body. In this example, a predetermined number (four in this example) of screw holes 290 are formed in the center of the upper region 242a.
As shown in FIG. 82, the cable hole 292 is a circular hole with a diameter d, and has the same shape as a second ventilation hole 282 and a third ventilation hole 283, which will be described later. In this example, a predetermined number (one in this example) of cable holes 292 are formed below the first ventilation hole 281 at the left end of the outer wall of the back plate 242 .

<Back/Central area>
A voltage display sticker 294 (display means) on which a voltage display is written is affixed to the central region 242b of the outer wall of the back plate 242, and a second ventilation hole 282 and a second ventilation hole 282 for ventilation of the main body 101 are attached. Three ventilation holes 283 and a rectangular protrusion 297 having a predetermined thickness are formed. Although this example shows an example in which a rectangular convex portion 297 is formed on the back plate 242, a concave portion having a predetermined thickness may be formed, and either a convex portion or a concave portion may be formed. The shape is not limited to a rectangular shape, but may be a square shape, an elliptical shape, etc. (the same applies to other embodiments).

As shown in FIG. 82, the voltage display sticker 294 is a horizontally long rectangular sticker with a vertical width s1 and a horizontal width t1 (s1<t1), and the rated voltage of the slot machine 100, a logo mark, etc. are displayed on the surface. Are listed. Note that the display on the voltage display sticker 294 will be explained in detail using FIG. 83.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (the outer wall of the housing) in an area (first area FE) located at the center in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction. There is.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101; It is arranged at a lower distance s3 (second distance) from the lower end 101D (the other end) opposite to the lower end 101D (the other end).

The vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), the lower distance s3 (the shortest distance from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101) The relationship between the sizes of the shortest distances is s1<s2<s3, where the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the upper end 101U of the main body 101 than the lower end 101D. It is located.

Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a left distance t2 (first distance) from the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101, and is located at the right end 101R (other end) of the outer wall opposite to the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101. They are arranged at a distance t3 (second distance) from the end) to the right side.

Width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, left distance t2 (shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) (shortest distance) is t2<t1<t3, the left distance t2 is shorter than the right distance t3, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101 than the right end 101R of the outer wall. It is located in

According to this example, by arranging information indicating the rated voltage etc. on the outer wall of the main body 101, operators can easily install and transport the game machine without having to open the door like in conventional game machines. The voltage can be easily and reliably checked, increasing convenience for the operator.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the attachment positions of the main control board storage case 210 and the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294); It is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the voltage display sticker 294 and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.

The second ventilation hole 282 and the third ventilation hole 283 are circular holes with a diameter d, as shown in FIG. 82, and have the same shape as the cable hole 292 described above. In this example, a predetermined number (one in this example) of second ventilation holes 282 are formed below the voltage display sticker 294 at the center left end of the back plate 242. Several (one in this example) third ventilation holes 283 are formed.

In this example, the vertical width x and horizontal width y of the first ventilation hole 281, the diameter d of the second ventilation hole 282, the third ventilation hole 282, and the cable hole 292 are the vertical width s1 and the horizontal width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294. It is designed to be smaller than the

With such a configuration, even if the voltage display sticker 294 peels off during installation or transportation of the slot machine 100, the damaged voltage display sticker 294 will be removed from the first ventilation hole 281 and the second ventilation hole 281. It is possible to prevent the cable from entering the inside of the main body 101 through the ventilation hole 282, the third ventilation hole 282, the cable hole 292, etc.

Further, a rectangular convex portion 297 having a predetermined thickness is formed in the central region 242b of the back plate 242. A hole 295 for the medal supply machine described above (see FIG. 79) is formed in a part of this convex portion 297, and a lid 296 for the medal supply machine is removable so as to close this hole 295 for the medal supply machine. is attached to.

In this example, the thickness of the voltage display sticker 294 is made thinner than the thickness of the convex portion 297, so that if a worker or an obstacle touches the back plate 242 during installation or transportation of the slot machine 100, However, in some cases, the convex portion 297 can prevent contact with the voltage display sticker 294, and deterioration of the voltage display sticker 294 can be prevented.

Note that the shape and position of the convex portion 297 are not particularly limited. For example, when the voltage display sticker 294 is placed near the left side plate 262 (or right side plate 263) on the back plate 242, the shape and position of the convex portion 297 are not particularly limited. If the side surface (rear side surface) of the face plate 263) is made to protrude beyond the surface of the back plate 242, and the thickness of the voltage display sticker 294 is made thinner than the height of the protruding part of the left side plate 262 (or right side plate 263), Even if the worker touches the back plate 242, the protrusion of the left side plate 262 (or right side plate 263) may prevent the worker from touching the voltage display seal 294, which may cause deterioration of the voltage display seal 294. can be prevented. In other words, if there is a step between the edge of the back of the case (left and right side panels) and the back panel on the back of the case, make contact by making the voltage display sticker thinner (lower) than the thickness of the step. , deterioration, and damage can be prevented.

<Back/lower area>
A fourth ventilation hole 284 and a fifth ventilation hole 285 for ventilating the main body 101 and a power cord hole 266 for inserting the power cord 265 are formed in the lower region 242c of the back plate 242. Note that the power cord hole 266 also functions as a ventilation hole for ventilating the main body 101.

The fourth ventilation hole 284 has the same shape as the first ventilation hole 281 described above, and is a vertically long elliptical hole with a vertical width x and a horizontal width y (x>y). In this example, the back plate 242 is arranged in two areas, an upper area and a lower area, in the center, and each area has a predetermined number (nine in this example) of fourth areas at approximately equal intervals. A ventilation hole 284 is formed.

The fifth ventilation hole 285 is an elliptical hole with a vertical width smaller than that of the fourth ventilation hole 284, and a hole with a maximum diameter smaller than that of the cable hole 292. In this example, a predetermined number (nine in this example) of fifth ventilation holes 285 are formed at approximately equal intervals below the fourth ventilation hole 284 .

The power cord hole 266 has a larger diameter than the second ventilation hole 282, the third ventilation hole 283, and the cable hole 292, and the power cord 265 connected to the power supply box 252 is inserted therethrough. In this example, a predetermined number (one in this example) of power cord holes 266 are formed on the right side of the fifth ventilation hole 285.
The "power cord" according to the present invention is one in which the power cord 265 and the power box 252 are connected inside the main body 101, and the power cord 256 is pulled out from the power cord hole 266 to the outside of the main body 101 (drawer). type of power cord). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the power cord from being lost.
Further, the "power cord" according to the present invention may be one that is inserted into a connector of a power box (power supply device) exposed from the back of the main body 101 (insertion type power cord). With this configuration, it is possible to save the effort of pulling out the power cord from inside the main body 101 to the outside. Furthermore, whether it is a pull-out type power cord or a plug-in type power cord, the power cord is disposed at the back of the main body 101 and is extended toward an outlet in a game parlor or the like.

<Voltage display sticker>
Next, the voltage display sticker 294 will be explained using FIG. 83 and FIG. 84(a). FIG. 83 is a perspective view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 and some members of the main body 101 removed.

As explained using FIGS. 81 and 82, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in the first area FE on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing), and is located in the main control board storage case. 210 (board case) is arranged in a second area SE on the inner wall (inner wall of the housing) of the back plate 242 of the main body 101, and the first area FE and the second area SE are located on the back of the main body 101. This is a non-overlapping area on the face plate 242 (casing).

In this example, a region (first region FE) in which the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged overlaps in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294) (opposite to the first region in the thickness direction). The structure is such that no member, including the main control board storage case 210, is placed in the area of the inner wall.
Specifically, in FIG. 83, a gray area surrounded by a chain line indicates an area (first area FE) to which the voltage display sticker 294 is pasted. As is clear from the first area FE shown in the figure and the second area SE shown in FIG. The arrangement position (second area SE) has a positional relationship in which they do not overlap in plan view of the voltage display sticker 294 (opposed positional relationship of the first area FE and second area SE).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.

FIG. 84(a) is a front view of the voltage display sticker 294. Displays written on the voltage display sticker 294 can be broadly classified into a logo mark 294a, device information 294b, and precautions 294c. The logo mark 294a is a figure, character, or the like representing the manufacturer of the slot machine 100, and in this example, the trademark of the manufacturer is written.

The device information 294b is information regarding the slot machine 100, and in this example, the manufacturer name, rated frequency, rated voltage, rated power consumption, maximum input current, and place of use are described.

According to this example, by arranging information indicating the rated voltage on the back plate 242 of the main body 100, the operator can reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the slot machine 100, and the rated voltage is It is possible to prevent a situation in which different voltages are supplied, and it is possible to ensure safety when power is turned on.

Further, as described above, the power supply box 252 converts the AC power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and each device. However, in this example, the voltage value after conversion by the power supply box 252 (9V in this example) is not displayed as the device information 294.

According to this example, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an operator mistakes the converted voltage value for the rated voltage, and it is possible to ensure safety when turning on the power.

Note that the voltage value after conversion by the power supply box 252 may be displayed on a device (for example, the power supply box 252) arranged inside the main body 101, a board, or the like. Furthermore, the items listed in the device information 294 are not limited to this example, and include information such as the PSE mark (a mark posted on electrical appliances that comply with the standards of the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Act) and the weight of the slot machine 100. May be written.

Precautions 294c describe precautions when handling the slot machine 100, and in this example, they include ``Do not get wet with water,'' ``Do not block the ventilation holes,'' and ``Earth grounding.'' "Please do not modify or insert foreign objects into the product."

Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is a colored opaque sticker that includes white (a certain color), and in this example, the base (base material) is white and includes a logo mark 294a, device information 294b, and precautions. 294c is a black character, and the white color of the base is different from the color of the back plate 242 (black in this example).

According to this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is configured to include a color (white) different from the color (black) of the back plate 242, the voltage display sticker 294 can be made to stand out, and the slot machine When installing or transporting the 100, the operator can reliably check the voltage.
Note that the voltage display sticker 294 is not limited to a sticker, and may be a label or a sticker. Further, in this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is attached directly to the outer wall of the casing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plate to which the voltage display sticker 294 is affixed may be placed on the outer wall of the casing. In this case, the plate with the sticker attached may be used as a voltage display label.

FIGS. 84(b) to 84(d) are front views of voltage display stickers according to modified examples.

The voltage display sticker shown in FIG. 84(b) is a colored opaque sticker including white and silver (a certain color). In this example, the base (base material) is black, and the logo mark 294a, The device information 294b and the notes 294c are written in white or silver, and the black color of the base is different from the color of the back plate 242 (black in this example).

According to this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is configured to include a color (white or silver) different from the color (black) of the back plate 242, the voltage display sticker 294 can be made to stand out. The operator can reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the slot machine 100.

The voltage display sticker shown in FIG. 84(c) is the same as the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG. 84(a), with the precaution 294c removed, and is composed of a logo mark 294a and device information 294b. .

According to this example, by omitting the precautions, the rated voltage described in the device information 294b can be made more prominent, and the operator can reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the slot machine 100. can be done.

The voltage display sticker shown in FIG. 84(d) is obtained by deleting the logo mark 294a and precautions 294c from the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG. 84(a), and simplifying the contents of the device information 294b. This is a list of the minimum necessary matters.

According to this example, by omitting the logo mark and precautions, the rated voltage described in the device information 294b can be made more conspicuous. It can be confirmed with certainty.
Furthermore, by making the voltage display stickers shown in FIGS. 84(c) and (d) smaller in size than the voltage display stickers shown in FIGS. 84(a) and (b), there is greater flexibility in the attachment position on the outer wall of the casing. can be raised. In addition, it is preferable that the voltage display sticker 294 be pasted at a position where the voltage display sticker 294 does not overlap (overlaps) components such as the board inside the casing or the screw holes for attaching the components when viewed from above. , as shown in FIGS. 84(c) and 84(d), the degree of freedom can be increased in the arrangement of members inside the casing, and the positional relationship between the pasting position and the members inside the casing can be increased. The degree of freedom can be increased.

Note that the color of the outer wall of the main body 101 is not particularly limited, and for example, if the main body 101 is made of metal (for example, aluminum), it may be a metal color, or if it is made of wood, it may be the natural color of the wood. (uncolored) may be used. Further, a part of the main body 101 may be colored. For example, when the back plate 242 of the main body 101 is the natural color of wood (uncolored), the upper face plate 261 surrounding the four sides of this back plate 242, the left side The face plate 262, right side plate 263, and bottom plate 264 may be colored black, and in this case, the voltage display sticker 294 may contain any color other than black (or the natural color of wood).

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 77, the pachinko machine) has a box-shaped casing (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIG. 77) having an opening in the front. and a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 77) disposed in the opening of the housing so as to be openable and closable, and a power switch (for example, the power switch 244 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79). A game machine equipped with a power supply device (for example, the power supply box 252 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79) and a display means that shows a certain display (for example, the voltage display sticker 294 shown in FIGS. 81 and 84(a)) The power switch is operable when the door body is in an open state, the certain display includes a rated voltage display indicating the rated voltage of the gaming machine, and the display means It is characterized by being arranged in a first region FE on the outer wall of the body (for example, a position closer to the upper end 101U than the lower end 101D of the main body 101 and closer to the left end 101L of the outer wall than the right end 101R of the outer wall). It is a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by arranging information indicating the rated voltage etc. on the outer wall of the housing, there is no need to open the door like in conventional game machines when installing the game machine. The operator can easily and reliably check the voltage during transportation, increasing convenience for the operator.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

In addition, a board case (for example, the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79) that can accommodate a certain component (for example, a board (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 79)), an external centralized board case shown in FIG. terminal plate 248), the certain component is arranged in a second area (for example, the second area SE shown in FIG. 81 etc.) on the inner wall of the casing, and The area may be an area where at least a portion of the display means does not overlap when viewed from above.

With this configuration, the bonding positions of the board case and the display means (voltage display sticker) do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294), so the board To ensure safety by preventing the display means (voltage display sticker) from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the display means (voltage display sticker) and making the display of the rated voltage, etc. written on the display means (voltage display sticker) unclear. I can do it.

Further, the display means is a label configured to include a certain color (for example, white (base and character color), silver color (character color)), and the certain color is a label that is formed on the outer wall of the casing. The color may be different from the color (for example, black).

With this configuration, the presence of the label (voltage display sticker) can be made noticeable on the casing, and the operator can reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine.

In addition, the display means is located at a distance (for example, from the four ends of the outer wall (for example, the upper end 101U, the lower end 101D, the left end 101L of the outer wall, and the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall of the housing. They may be placed with a gap of several millimeters between them.

With such a configuration, even if a worker touches the casing during installation or transportation of the game machine, it may be possible to prevent the worker from touching the display means (voltage display sticker). It is possible to prevent the display means (voltage display sticker) from peeling off from the housing, deterioration, or damage.

Further, the display means is disposed on the outer wall of the casing at a first distance (for example, distance s2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the upper end 101U shown in FIG. 82), and The display means is arranged on the outer wall of the casing at a second distance (e.g., distance s3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (e.g., lower end 101D shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall opposite to the one end. The first distance and the second distance may be different.

Further, the display means is arranged on the outer wall of the casing at a first distance (for example, distance t2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82), The display means is arranged at a second distance (e.g., distance t3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end of the outer wall opposite to the one end (e.g., outer wall right end 101R shown in FIG. 82) on the outer wall of the casing. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

With such a configuration, the presence of the display means (voltage display sticker) can be made clear by intentionally arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) so as to be biased toward either one end or the other end of the outer wall of the housing. It can be made conspicuous, allowing workers to reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine.

Further, in the gaming machine, power is supplied to the power supply device through a power cord (for example, the power cord 265 shown in FIG. 81), and the gaming machine has the power cord extending from the back of the casing. The display means may be arranged at the back of the housing.

With this configuration, workers can reliably check the voltage when laying power cords during installation work of game machines, etc., and avoid situations where a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to prevent this from occurring and ensure safety when turning on the power.
Further, when the game machine is installed, by arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) on the back of the case where the player cannot see it, the design of the game machine when viewed from the front can be ensured. Furthermore, since the player does not touch the display means, the risk of the display means (voltage display sticker) being peeled off or damaged can be reduced.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 1)>
Next, an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294 (Modification 1) will be described using FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (Modification 1) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area (first area FE) located at the center in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing), It is arranged in an area closer to the power supply box 252 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 explained using FIG. 81.

Specifically, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and is spaced apart from the lower end 101D (the other end) opposite the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101. end) at a lower distance s3 (second distance).

The vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), the lower distance s3 (the shortest distance from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101) The relationship between the sizes of the shortest distances is s1<s2<s3, where the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the upper end 101U of the main body 101 than the lower end 101D. It is located.
Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a distance s5 upward from the center M2 in the height direction of the main body 101, that is, above the center in the height direction (vertical direction) of the back plate 242 of the main body 101. has been done. Further, the power supply box 252 is arranged at a distance s4 downward from the center M2 of the main body 101 in the height direction. The relationship between the distances s4 and s5 is s5<s4, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the center M2 of the main body 101 in the height direction than the power supply box 252.

Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a left distance t2 (first distance) from the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101, and is located at the right end 101R (other end) of the outer wall opposite to the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101. They are arranged at a distance t3 (second distance) from the end) to the right side.

The width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), the right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) (shortest distance) is t3 < t1 < t2, the right distance t3 is shorter than the left distance t2, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the right edge 101R of the outer wall than the left edge 101L of the main body 101. It is located in

According to this example, information indicating the rated voltage, etc. is placed on the side where the power supply box 252 is arranged (near the power supply device) in the left-right direction on the back of the case, so that it can be used like a conventional game machine. Even without opening the door body, a worker can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting a game machine, increasing convenience for the worker.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area close to the power supply box 252, the worker can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of a game machine, etc., and the rated voltage This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from that of the above voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.

Further, in this example, the configuration is such that ventilation holes such as the second ventilation hole 282 and the third ventilation hole 283 are not arranged below the region (first region FE) where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged. .

With this configuration, the voltage display sticker 294 is not exposed to the warm air discharged from the ventilation hole, and the voltage display sticker 294 is not deteriorated by the heat discharged from the ventilation hole, and the voltage display sticker 294 is not written on the voltage display sticker 294. It is possible to prevent the display of rated voltage, etc., from becoming unclear and ensure safety.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 2)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification 2) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 2) of the voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area (first area FE) located below in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing), It is arranged in an area closer to the power supply box 252 (near the upper part of the power supply box 252) than the arrangement region of the voltage display sticker 294 explained using FIG. 85.

Specifically, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101) (the shortest distance to the lower end 101D of It is located near 101D.
Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is located at a distance s5 downward from the center M2 in the height direction of the main body 101, that is, below the center in the height direction (vertical direction) of the back plate 242 of the main body 101. Further, in the lower region thereof, it is located at a distance s4 downward from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 (near the power supply box 252). The magnitude relationship between the distance s4 and the distance s5 is s4<s5, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at a position closer to the power supply box 252 than the center M2 of the main body 101 in the height direction.

Note that the voltage display sticker 294 has a width t1, a left side distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101), and a right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101). The magnitude relationship between the shortest distance to the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG. 85 is the same as that of the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG.

According to this example, information indicating the rated voltage, etc. is placed on the side where the power supply box 252 is arranged (near the power supply device) in the left-right direction on the back of the case, so that it can be used like a conventional game machine. Even without opening the door body, a worker can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting a game machine, increasing convenience for the worker.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area close to the power supply box 252, the worker can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of a game machine, etc., and the rated voltage This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from that of the above voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294). In this example, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged (the first area FE) is also connected to the power supply box 252 and the relay board related to the power supply box 252 in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (the first region FE). It is preferable that the positional relationship is such that they do not overlap in plan view.

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.

Further, in this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is configured not to be disposed below the power supply box 252.

The power supply box is often placed below the housing, but with this configuration, it is possible to prevent the lower part of the housing from coming into contact with an obstacle, etc. during installation or transportation of the slot machine 100. Even if the voltage display sticker 294 is touched, it may be possible to prevent contact with the voltage display sticker 294, and deterioration and damage of the voltage display sticker 294 can be prevented.
Furthermore, even when the power cords 256 are bundled when installing or transporting the slot machine 100, there is a risk that the voltage display sticker 294 may become difficult to see due to the bundled power cords 256. It is preferable that the display sticker 294 is not placed below the power supply box 252. Furthermore, some gaming parlors have dim lighting, and when installing the slot machine 100, the lower part of the back of the housing may be dark, so the voltage display sticker 294 should be placed lower than the power supply box 252. It is preferable not to place it.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 3)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification example 3) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 3) of the voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area (first area FE) located above in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing), It is arranged in an area farther from the power supply box 252 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 explained using FIGS. 85 and 86 (near the upper end 101U of the main body 101).

Specifically, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101) (shortest distance to the lower end 101D) is s2<s1<s3, where the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. It is located near 101U.

Note that the voltage display sticker 294 has a width t1, a left side distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101), and a right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101). The magnitude relationship of the shortest distance to the voltage display sticker 294 is the same as that of the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIGS. 85 and 86.

According to this example, information indicating the rated voltage, etc. is placed on the side where the power supply box 252 is arranged (near the power supply device) in the left-right direction on the back of the case, so that it can be used like a conventional game machine. Even without opening the door body, a worker can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting a game machine, increasing convenience for the worker.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area close to the power supply box 252, the worker can reliably check the voltage when laying the power cord in the installation work of a game machine, etc., and the rated voltage This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from that of the above voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by pasting the voltage display sticker 294 on the upper region 242a of the back plate 242 at a position close to the upper end 101U of the main body 101, it can be easily seen when looking into the back of the casing from the front of the casing. It can be done.
In addition, by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 in the area located above the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction, the voltage can be displayed on the replenishment nozzle of the medal replenishing machine or the mounting member of the replenishment nozzle, etc. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the seal 294 from being obstructed. Note that such an effect is the same in the example using FIG. 89, which will be described later. Furthermore, the same effect can be achieved by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 below the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the right or left side in the horizontal direction.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294). Further, in this example, the area (first area FE) where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged is not limited to the main control board 210a, but is related to the sub-control board 220a (see FIG. 79) and the sub-control board 220a. Preferably, the positional relationship does not overlap with the relay board or the like in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). In addition, it is preferable that the positional relationship not only be with the sub-control board 220a but also with the relay board related to the production control board and the selection control board (not shown) so that they do not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). .

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.

As explained above, the game machines according to Modifications 1 to 3 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. a main body 101) shown in FIG. 265) and is provided with a power switch (e.g., power switch 244 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79), such as the power supply box 252 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, and a display showing a certain display. means (for example, the voltage display sticker 294 shown in FIGS. 85 and 84(a)), the power switch is operable when the door body is in an open state, and the power switch is operable when the door body is in an open state; The power supply device is arranged inside the housing, and the power cord is configured to extend from the back of the housing, and the certain display shows a rated voltage display indicating the rated voltage of the gaming machine. The display means is arranged in a first area (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIGS. 85 to 87) on the side where the power supply device is arranged in the left-right direction of the back of the housing (for example, the right side of the back). This game machine is located at a position closer to the right end 101R of the outer wall than to the left end 101L of the outer wall.

According to the gaming machines according to Modifications 1 to 3, the information indicating the rated voltage, etc. can be placed on the side where the power supply device is arranged (near the power supply device) in the left-right direction on the back of the case. , the operator can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine without having to open the door like in conventional game machines, increasing the convenience of the operator. .

In particular, since the display means (voltage display sticker) is placed in an area close to the power supply device, workers can reliably check the voltage when laying power cords during installation work of game machines, etc. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

In addition, a board case (for example, the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79) that can accommodate a certain component (for example, a board (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 79)), an external centralized board case shown in FIG. terminal plate 248), and the certain component is disposed in a second area (for example, the second area SE shown in FIGS. 85 to 87) on the inner wall of the casing, and The second area may be an area where at least a portion of the display means does not overlap when viewed from above.

With this configuration, the bonding positions of the board case and the display means (voltage display sticker) do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294), so the board To ensure safety by preventing the display means (voltage display sticker) from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the display means (voltage display sticker) and making the display of the rated voltage, etc. written on the display means (voltage display sticker) unclear. I can do it.

Further, the display means is a label configured to include a certain color (for example, white (base and character color), silver color (character color)), and the certain color is The color may be different from the color (for example, black).

With this configuration, the presence of the label (voltage display sticker) on the back of the case can be made conspicuous, allowing operators to reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine. .

Further, the display means is arranged at a distance (for example, from the four ends of the back of the casing (for example, the upper end 101U, lower end 101D, outer wall left end 101L, and outer wall right end 101R of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 82) of the back of the housing. , several millimeters) apart.

With such a configuration, even if a worker touches the casing during installation or transportation of the game machine, it may be possible to prevent the worker from touching the display means (voltage display sticker). It is possible to prevent the display means (voltage display sticker) from peeling off from the housing, deterioration, or damage.

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the casing at a first distance (for example, distance s2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the upper end 101U shown in FIG. 82), and The display means is arranged at a second distance (e.g., distance s3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (e.g., lower end 101D shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall opposite to the one end of the outer wall at the back of the casing. The first distance and the second distance may be different.

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the casing at a first distance (for example, distance t2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82), The display means is spaced a second distance (e.g., distance t3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end of the outer wall opposite to the one end (e.g., outer wall right end 101R shown in FIG. 82) at the back of the casing. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

With such a configuration, the presence of the display means (voltage display sticker) can be made clear by intentionally arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) so as to be biased towards either one end or the other end of the outer wall of the housing. It can be made conspicuous, allowing workers to reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 4)>
Next, an arrangement example (modified example 4) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modified example 4) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area (first area FE) located above in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing), It is arranged closer to the center of the main body 101 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 explained using FIG. 87.

Specifically, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed a distance t2 (first distance) to the left from the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101, and the right end of the outer wall opposite to the left end 101L (one end) of the outer wall of the main body 101. It is arranged at a distance t3 (second distance) to the right from 101R (the other end).

The width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), the right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101) The magnitude relationship of the shortest distance is t1<t2≈t3, and the left distance t2 and the right distance t3 are approximately the same distance, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged approximately at the center in the left-right direction of the main body 101. There is. Further, the positional relationship is such that the center of the main body 101 in the width direction and the center of the voltage display sticker 294 in the width direction almost match.

In addition, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101) The magnitude relationship of the shortest distance to the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG. 87 is the same as that of the voltage display sticker 294 described using FIG.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented. In addition, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed on the upper side and approximately in the center of the back of the case, when transporting the slot machine 100 or displaying the slot machine 100 in a warehouse, it is possible to remove the case from the front of the case. It is easy to notice when looking into the back.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 5)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification 5) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 5) of the voltage display sticker 294, and various dimensions are shown.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area (first area FE) located above in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing), It is arranged closer to the left end of the main body 101 than the arrangement area of the voltage display sticker 294 explained using FIG. 87.

Specifically, the width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101L of the outer wall of the main body 101), and the right distance t3 (the shortest distance from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end of the main body 101). The shortest distance to the right end of the outer wall 101R) is t2<t1<t3, and the right distance t3 is longer than the left distance t2, and the voltage display sticker 294 is placed on the left side of the main body 101 in the left-right direction. has been done.

Further, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and from the lower end 101D (other end) opposite to the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101. They are arranged at a lower distance s3 (second distance), and are arranged at an inter-cable hole distance s4 from the upper end of the cable hole 292.

The vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), the lower distance s3 (the shortest distance from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101) The relationship between the sizes of the shortest distances is s2<s1<s3, where the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the upper end 101U of the main body 101 than the lower end 101D. It is located.

In addition, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the distance between cable holes s4 (from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the cable hole 292) s4 < s2, s4 < s1, the cable hole distance s4 is shorter than the upper distance s2, and the voltage display sticker 294 is closer to the cable hole than the upper end 101U of the main body 101. It is located near 292.
Note that the voltage display sticker 294 may be placed closer to the cable hole 292 by making the upper distance s2 of the voltage display sticker 294 longer than the distance s4 between the cable holes (s4<s2). good. Further, in addition to pasting the voltage display sticker 294 on the upper side of the cable hole 292, the voltage display sticker 294 may be pasted on the lower side of the cable hole 292.

According to this example, information indicating the rated voltage, etc. is stored in the cable hole 292, which is located on the side where the power supply box 252 is not placed in the left-right direction on the back of the housing, and through which the cable connected to the external device can be inserted. By placing it nearby, workers can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting a game machine without having to open the door like in conventional game machines, making it convenient for workers. You can increase your sexuality. In addition, by pasting the voltage display sticker 294 in the upper region 242a of the back plate 242 at a position close to the upper end 101U of the main body 101, it can be easily seen when looking into the back of the casing from the front of the casing. You can do it like this.
In addition, by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 in the area located above the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction, the voltage can be displayed on the replenishment nozzle of the medal replenisher or the mounting member of the replenishment nozzle, etc. It is possible to prevent the visibility of the seal 294 from being obstructed. Furthermore, the same effect can be achieved by arranging the voltage display sticker 294 below the main body 101 in the vertical direction and on the right or left side in the horizontal direction.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area close to the cable hole 292, the worker can easily It is possible to reliably check the voltage of the device, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294). In addition, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged (first area FE) must be in a positional relationship that does not overlap with the relay board or the external collective terminal board in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (plan view of the voltage display sticker 294). is preferred.

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.

Further, in this example, the size of the cable hole 292 is made smaller than the size of the voltage display sticker 294.

According to this example, even if the voltage display sticker 294 peels off, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from entering the inside of the main body 101 through the cable hole 292 and causing a problem. It becomes possible to do so.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to Modification 5 (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 77 or the pachinko machine) has a box-shaped casing (for example, the main body 101 shown in FIG. 77) having an opening in the front. ), a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 77) disposed in an openable and closable manner at the opening of the housing, and a power cord (for example, the power cord 265 shown in FIGS. 81 and 89). A power supply device (for example, the power supply box 252 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79) that is supplied with power and has a power switch (for example, the power switch 244 shown in FIG. 78), and a display means that shows a certain display (for example, the power switch 244 shown in FIG. , a voltage display sticker 294) shown in FIG. 84(a), the power switch is operable when the door body is in an open state, and the power supply device The certain display includes a rated voltage display indicating the rated voltage of the gaming machine, and the display means , a first area on the side where the power supply device is not arranged in the left-right direction of the back of the casing (for example, the left side of the back) (for example, the outer wall left end 101L of the main body 101 is lower than the outer wall right end 101R of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 89). 89), and an insertion hole (for example, cable hole 292 shown in FIG. 89) through which a cable connectable to an external device can be inserted is formed near the first region. This is a unique game machine.

According to the game machine according to Modification Example 5, information indicating the rated voltage, etc. is inserted into the back side of the case in the left-right direction on the side where the power supply device is not arranged and through which the cable connected to the external device can be inserted. By placing it near the hole, workers can easily and reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine, without having to open the door like in conventional game machines. can increase the convenience of

In particular, since the display means (voltage display sticker) is placed in the area close to the insertion hole, when connecting external cables such as hall computers to the external centralized terminal board of the game machine during installation work of the game machine, etc. The operator can reliably check the voltage, preventing a situation where a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and ensuring safety when turning on the power.

Additionally, in the past, gaming machines with a rated voltage of 100V and gaming machines with a rated voltage of 24V coexisted on the market, and accidents could occur where workers mistakenly supplied the voltage to the gaming machines. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, the operator can reliably check the voltage in advance, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied. It is possible to ensure safety when the power is turned on. Moreover, since the power switch cannot be operated unless the door body is opened, even if the power supply is accidentally connected to an outlet with a different power supply, it is possible to prevent the power from being turned on immediately after connecting to the outlet.

In addition, a board case (for example, the main control board storage case 210 shown in FIGS. 78 and 79) that can accommodate a certain component (for example, a board (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 79)), an external centralized board case shown in FIG. terminal plate 248), the certain component is arranged in a second area (for example, the second area SE shown in FIG. 89) on the inner wall of the casing, and The area may be an area at least partially not overlapping when viewed in plan of the display means.

With this configuration, the bonding positions of the board case and the display means (voltage display sticker) do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294), so the board To ensure safety by preventing the display means (voltage display sticker) from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the display means (voltage display sticker) and making the display of the rated voltage, etc. written on the display means (voltage display sticker) unclear. I can do it.

Further, the display means is a label configured to include a certain color (for example, white (base and character color), silver color (character color)), and the certain color is The color may be different from the color (for example, black).

With this configuration, the presence of the label (voltage display sticker) on the back of the case can be made conspicuous, allowing operators to reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine. .

Further, the display means is arranged at a distance (for example, from the four ends of the back of the casing (for example, the upper end 101U, lower end 101D, outer wall left end 101L, and outer wall right end 101R of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 82) of the back of the housing. , several millimeters) apart.

With this configuration, the presence of the sticker (voltage display sticker) can be made noticeable on the back of the case, allowing operators to reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine. .

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the casing at a first distance (for example, distance s2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the upper end 101U shown in FIG. 82), and The display means is arranged at a second distance (e.g., distance s3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end (e.g., lower end 101D shown in FIG. 82) of the outer wall opposite to the one end of the outer wall at the back of the casing. The first distance and the second distance may be different.

Further, the display means is arranged at the back of the casing at a first distance (for example, distance t2 shown in FIG. 82) from one end of the outer wall (for example, the left end 101L of the outer wall shown in FIG. 82), The display means is spaced a second distance (e.g., distance t3 shown in FIG. 82) from the other end of the outer wall opposite to the one end (e.g., outer wall right end 101R shown in FIG. 82) at the back of the casing. and the first distance and the second distance may be different.

With such a configuration, the presence of the display means (voltage display sticker) can be made clear by intentionally arranging the display means (voltage display sticker) so as to be biased towards either one end or the other end of the outer wall of the housing. It can be made conspicuous, allowing workers to reliably check the voltage when installing or transporting the game machine.

Further, the label may be larger than the insertion hole.

With this configuration, even if the label were to peel off, it would be possible to prevent the label from entering the inside of the casing through the insertion hole and causing problems. Become.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 6)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification 6) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modification 6) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area (first area FE) located approximately at the center (middle) in the vertical and horizontal directions on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). It is arranged near the lid 296 for the medal supply machine.

Specifically, the vertical width s1, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (the shortest distance from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101). The magnitude relationship of the shortest distance is s1<s2≈s3, and the lower distance s3 and the upper distance s2 are approximately the same distance, and the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged approximately at the center in the vertical direction of the main body 101. ing.

Also, the width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left side distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101), and the right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101). The magnitude relationship of t1 < t2 ≒ t3 (the shortest distance to ing.

In this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in the center of the main body 101, the operator can easily notice the presence of the voltage display sticker 294 during installation work of the slot machine 100, and the operator can reliably check the voltage. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

In particular, since the voltage display sticker 294 is placed near the medal replenishing machine lid 296, when the medal replenishing machine lid 296 is opened and the medal replenishing machine replenishing nozzle is inserted through the slot machine 100 installation work, etc. In addition, workers can reliably check the voltage, preventing situations where a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and ensuring safety when turning on the power. .

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294).

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.
In addition, not limited to this example, while the center of the main body 101 in the height direction and the center of the voltage display sticker 294 in the vertical direction are set in a positional relationship that almost coincides, the center of the main body 101 in the width direction and the center of the voltage display sticker 294 are The positions may be such that the centers in the width direction do not coincide with each other. By doing so, visibility can be prevented from being obstructed by the replenishment nozzle of the medal replenisher.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 7)>
Next, an arrangement example (modification example 7) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a rear view showing an arrangement example (modified example 7) of the voltage display sticker 294, and shows various dimensions.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed between the area where the main control board storage case 210 is placed (second area SE) and the thickness direction of the main body 101 on the outer wall of the back plate 242 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing). Although they overlap in the plan view of the voltage display sticker 294, they are arranged in areas that do not come into contact with the screw holes 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210.
That is, in this example, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 is placed (first area FE) and the area where the main control board storage case 210 is placed (second area SE) at least partially overlap. However, the positional relationship is such that it does not overlap with the screw hole 290 for fixing a member such as a board.

Specifically, the vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), and the lower distance s3 (from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101) (shortest distance to the lower end 101D) is s1<s2<s3, where the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3. It is located near 101U.

Also, the width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the left side distance t2 (the shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101), and the right distance t3 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right end 101R of the outer wall of the main body 101). The magnitude relationship of t1 < t2 ≒ t3 (the shortest distance to ing. Further, the center of the main body 101 in the width direction and the center of the voltage display sticker 294 in the width direction are in a positional relationship that almost coincides with each other.

According to this example, since the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged in an area that does not come into contact with the screw hole 290, the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to peel off and deteriorate, and the surface area of the voltage display sticker 294 can be controlled by the main control. Since the surface area is smaller than the surface area of the board storage case 210, the influence of heat emitted from the board can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming unclear and ensure safety.

<Arrangement of voltage display sticker (Modification 8)>
Next, an arrangement example (modified example 8) of the voltage display sticker 294 will be described using FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a side view of a housing showing an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294 (modified example 8), and various dimensions are shown.

In this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged on the outer wall of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101 (the outer wall of the housing) in an area (first area FE) located above in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction. There is. Note that the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, the voltage display sticker 294 may be placed on the left side plate 262 of the main body 101. In this case, it may be arranged in an area located above in the vertical direction and on the left side in the horizontal direction on the outer wall of the left side plate 262.

Specifically, the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged at an upper distance s2 (first distance) from the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101, and is spaced apart from the lower end 101D (the other end) opposite the upper end 101U (one end) of the main body 101. end) at a lower distance s3 (second distance).

The vertical width s1 of the voltage display sticker 294, the upper distance s2 (the shortest distance from the upper end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the upper end 101U of the main body 101), the lower distance s3 (the shortest distance from the lower end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the lower end 101D of the main body 101) The relationship between the sizes of the shortest distances is s2<s1<s3, where the upper distance s2 is shorter than the lower distance s3, and the voltage display sticker 294 is located closer to the upper end 101U of the main body 101 than the lower end 101D. It is located.

Width t1 of the voltage display sticker 294, left distance d1 (shortest distance from the left end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the left end 263L of the outer wall of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101), right distance d2 (from the right end of the voltage display sticker 294 to the right side of the main body 101) The shortest distance from the right end 263R of the outer wall of the face plate 262) is d2<t1<d1, and the right side distance d2 is shorter than the left side distance d1. The outer wall right end 263R is located closer to the outer wall right end 263R than the outer wall left side 263L.

According to this example, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed on the outer wall of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101 in an area located above in the vertical direction and on the right side in the horizontal direction (i.e., when the slot machine 100 is installed in an island facility of a game parlor). Because the voltage display sticker 294 is placed in an area hidden between adjacent slot machines and cannot be easily touched by players, the voltage display sticker 294 deteriorates and the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 deteriorates. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming unclear and ensure safety.

Further, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 of this example is arranged (first area FE) is the area where the main control board storage case 210 is arranged (second area SE), that is, the back plate 242 of the main body 101 On the inner wall of the main body 101 (the inner wall of the casing), the area located at the upper side in the vertical direction and in the center in the horizontal direction is a position that does not overlap in the thickness direction of the main body 101 (when viewed from above of the voltage display sticker 294).
Further, even if the external centralized terminal board 248 is installed on the side inner wall of the housing, the area where the voltage display sticker 294 is arranged (first area FE) and the external centralized terminal board 248 are arranged. The inner and outer regions (second regions) of the same wall member in the casing may have a positional relationship in which they do not overlap. Furthermore, the member disposed on the side inner wall of the housing is not limited to the external centralized terminal board 248, but may also be a relay board (relay board case) or a sub-control board (sub-control board case). . Further, the board is not limited to one housed in a board case, but may be one in which the board itself is disposed on the inner wall.

According to this example, the arrangement position of the main control board storage case 210 and the pasting position of the voltage display sticker 294 do not overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voltage display sticker 294 from deteriorating due to the heat emitted from the board and from making the display such as the rated voltage written on the voltage display sticker 294 unclear, thereby ensuring safety.

Further, the screw hole 290 for fixing the main control board storage case 210 and the attachment position of the voltage display sticker 294 may overlap (overlap) in the thickness direction of the casing (planar view of the voltage display sticker 294). This prevents situations where the voltage display sticker 294 cannot be properly pasted on the main body 101 due to the screw holes etc. being in the way, or situations where the display of the rated voltage etc. written on the voltage display sticker 294 is difficult to see due to the screw holes etc. This can be prevented.
Furthermore, as in this embodiment, the position where the main control board storage case 210 is placed and the position where the voltage display sticker 294 is pasted are not in a positional relationship between the inside and the outside of the same wall member (twisted positional relationship). By doing so, for example, if you try to forcefully remove the voltage display sticker 294 using a tool or the like, you can prevent a hole from forming in the wall and damage the parts inside the casing, or if you try to forcefully remove the voltage display sticker 294. It is also possible to make it difficult for vibrations to be transmitted.

<Placement of voltage display sticker (other variations)>
Next, an example of the arrangement of the voltage display sticker 294 (other variations) will be described using FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the arrangement of slot machines 100 stored in a warehouse or the like before being installed in an island facility.

Generally, before being installed in an island facility, a plurality of game machines are often stored adjacent to each other in the front and back direction in a warehouse of a game arcade or the like. Since a general game machine has a shape in which the lower part protrudes more forward than the upper part, when the game machine is stored in the state shown in FIG. 93, the distance between the front and rear game machines is The distance q at the bottom is shorter than that.

Therefore, when placing the voltage display sticker 294 on the back plate 242 of the slot machine 100, the voltage display sticker 294 should be placed closer to the slot machine 100 at the rear than at the bottom where it is difficult to secure a distance from the slot machine 100 at the rear. It is preferable to arrange the power supply box 252 at the upper part where it is easy to ensure the distance between the power supply box 252 and the power supply box 252. In particular, when the power supply box 252 is arranged at the lower part of the main body 101, it is preferable to configure the power supply box 252 not to be arranged below the power supply box 252. .

With such a configuration, even if multiple game machines are stored adjacent to each other in the front and back direction, a portion of the rear game machine will come into contact with the voltage display sticker of the front game machine. In some cases, such situations can be prevented, and deterioration and damage of the voltage display sticker can be prevented.

In addition, for a game machine whose top part protrudes more forward than the bottom part, the voltage display sticker should be placed so that the distance between it and the game machine at the rear is more secure than at the top part, where it is difficult to secure a distance from the game machine at the rear. It is preferable to place the voltage display sticker at the bottom of the game machine where it is easy to move.In the case of a game machine in which the center part has a shape that protrudes furthest forward, the voltage display sticker should be placed at the bottom of the game machine at the rear of the game machine, rather than the center part where it is difficult to secure a distance from the rear game machine. It is preferable to arrange it at the upper or lower part where it is easy to ensure a distance from the table.

That is, when a plurality of game machines are arranged adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction, it is preferable to arrange the voltage display sticker in an area where it is easy to ensure a distance from the rear game machine.

In the example described using FIG. 92, the voltage display sticker 294 is placed on the outer wall of the right side plate 263 of the main body 101 (outer wall of the housing) in an area (first Although an example is shown in which it is placed in the region FE), it may be placed near the grip portion 298 (handle) of the right side plate 263 (or left side plate 262) as shown in FIG.

With this configuration, when lifting the game machine by grasping the grip during transportation or installation of the game machine, the worker can easily notice the voltage display sticker, and the worker can reliably check the voltage. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a voltage different from the rated voltage is supplied, and to ensure safety when the power is turned on.

Further, the "outer wall of the casing" according to the present invention is not limited to the back plate 242, right side plate 263, and left side plate 262 of the main body 101, and may be the top plate 261, for example. Further, the "board" according to the present invention is not limited to the main board 210a that constitutes the main control unit, but may be other boards such as the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 79, for example. Further, the "display means" according to the present invention is not limited to a sticker, but may be a plate-like member made of metal or wood, or one produced by printing or painting on the casing. It may be.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Reel window 123 Announcement lamp 127 Payout number display 130, 131, 132 Medal input button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Production image display device 192 Production button (PUSH button)
272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control section 400 First sub-control section 500 Second sub-control section

In order to achieve the above object, the game machine according to the present invention includes, as one aspect thereof,
Multiple reels decorated with multiple types of designs and driven to rotate,
a start operation means for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
a first operating means operable by the player;
A performance means for performing the performance,
A game machine comprising:
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The presentation means is a means for executing the second operation promotion presentation after executing the first response presentation,
The first response performance is a performance that can specify that an advantageous benefit will be given to the player;
The second response performance is a performance that can specify the content of the benefit to be granted,
The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is a timing after the performance means executes the first response performance,
It is characterized by

Claims (1)

Multiple reels decorated with multiple types of designs and driven to rotate,
a start operation means for instructing the plurality of reels to start rotating;
a first operating means operable by the player;
A performance means for performing the performance,
A game machine comprising:
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a first timing,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the first operation means at a second timing after the first timing,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a first response performance when the first operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The performance means is a means capable of executing a second response performance when the second operation promotion performance is executed and the first operation means is operated,
The presentation means is a means for executing the second operation promotion presentation after executing the first response presentation,
The first timing and the second timing are included in a period from the instruction to start the rotation of a certain game to the instruction to start the rotation of the next game of the certain game,
The second timing is a timing after the performance means executes the first response performance,
A game machine characterized by: